IN THE
    MATTER
    OF:
    WASTE
    WATER
    PRETREATMENT
    UPDATE,
    USEPA
    AMENDMENTS
    (January)
    1, 2007
    through
    June
    30, 2007
    SDWA
    UPDATE,
    USEPA
    AMENDMENTS
    (January
    1, 2007
    through
    June 30,
    2007 and
    June
    2, 2007)
    SDWA
    UPDATE,
    USEPA
    AMENDMENTS
    (July
    1, 2007
    through
    December
    31,
    2007
    1)17
    NOV
    )
    R08-5
    )
    (Identical-Substance
    STATE
    OF
    IL.UNOIS
    )
    )
    Rulemaking-Pubic
    Supply
    Water
    OllUtiOfl
    Control
    Board
    )
    )
    R08-7
    )
    (Identical-in-Substance
    )
    Rulemaking-Public
    Water
    )
    Supply
    )
    R08-13
    )
    (Identical-in-Substance
    )
    Rulemaking-Public
    Water
    )
    Supply
    NOTICE
    OF FILING
    John
    Thenjault,
    Clerk
    Illinois
    Pollution
    Control
    Board
    James
    R.
    Thompson
    Center
    100
    W.
    Randolph,
    Suite
    11-500
    Chicago,
    IL
    60601
    Matt
    Dunn,
    Environmental
    Bureau
    Chief
    Office
    of the
    Attorney
    General
    69
    West
    Washington
    Street,
    Suite 1800
    Chicago,
    IL
    60602
    General
    Counsel
    Illinois
    Dept.
    Of Natural
    Resources
    One
    Natural
    Resources
    Way
    Springfield,
    IL
    62702-1271
    PLEASE
    TAKE
    NOTICE
    that
    I have
    filed with
    the
    Office of
    the Clerk
    of the
    Pollution
    Control
    Board
    the Illinois
    Environmental
    Protection
    Agency’s
    Comments
    in
    the above
    captioned
    matter,
    a
    copy
    of
    which
    is
    herewith
    served upon
    you.
    Date:
    November
    7, 2008
    1021 North
    Grand Avenue
    East
    Springfield,
    Illinois
    62794-9276
    (217)
    782-5544
    ILLINOIS
    ENVIRONMENTAL
    PROTECTION
    AGEN
    j
    BfliflJL
    efanie
    N.
    Diers
    1/
    /ssistant
    Counsel
    tMivision
    of Legal
    Counsel
    ILLINOIS
    POLLUTION
    CONTROL
    BOARD
    LERc
    8
    OPFICE
    )
    )
    THIS FILING
    IS SUBMITTED
    ON
    RECYCLED
    PAPER

    ILLINOIS
    POLLUTION
    CONTROL
    BOARD
    IN
    THE
    MATTER OF:
    )
    WASTEWATER
    PRETREATMENT
    )
    R08-5
    UPDATE,
    USEPA
    AMENDMENTS
    (January)
    )
    (Identical-Substance
    1,
    2007
    through
    June
    30, 2007
    )
    Rulemaking-Pubic
    Water
    )
    Supply)
    )
    SDWA
    UPDATE,
    USEPA
    AMENDMENTS
    )
    R08-7
    (January
    1,
    2007
    through
    June
    30,
    2007
    and
    )
    (Identical-in-Substance
    June
    2, 2007)
    )
    Rulemaking-Public
    Water
    )
    Supply)
    )
    )
    SDWA
    UPDATE, USEPA
    AMENDMENTS
    )
    R08-13
    (July
    1,
    2007
    through
    December
    31,
    2007
    )
    (Identical-in-Substance
    )
    Rulemaking-Public
    Water
    )
    Supply)
    ILLINOIS
    ENVIRONMENTAL
    PROTECTION
    AGENCY’S
    COMMENTS
    Now
    comes
    the
    Illinois
    Environmental
    Protection
    Agency
    (“Illinois
    EPA”
    or
    “Agency”)
    by
    and
    through
    its
    attorney
    and
    hereby
    submits
    the
    following
    comments
    in
    the
    above
    captioned
    cases.
    Illinois
    EPA
    respectfully
    states
    as follows:
    COMMENTS
    WITH
    RESPEST
    TO
    THE
    BOARD’S
    ORDER
    AUGUST
    7,
    2008
    1.
    Typo’s
    occur
    on
    the
    following
    pages:
    84(611.350),
    90(611.351),
    93(611.353),
    97(611.354), 110(611.355),
    129(611.356),
    135(611.357),
    139(611.358),
    140(611.359a),
    147(611.360)
    and
    234(611.884).
    These
    are in
    the
    BOARD
    NOTE
    parts
    where
    (October
    12,
    2007)
    needs
    to
    be changed
    to
    (October
    10,
    2007).
    2.
    There
    is
    a
    typo
    on Page
    94
    at
    611.354
    b) 1)
    G3
    - this
    needs
    to
    be
    changed
    to
    3C.
    3.
    Omission
    on
    Page
    140 at
    61 1.359(a)(2)(D)
    — second
    line,
    change
    to
    read
    “.
    . .described
    in
    subsection
    (a)(2)
    (a)(1)
    of
    this
    Section.”

    4.
    Typo on
    Page
    194, Section
    611.61
    1(a)(18)(E),
    BOARD
    NOTE,
    next
    to last
    line:
    change
    “200”
    to
    “2000”.
    5.
    Typo
    on Page
    224,
    Section
    611.720(a)(10)(B),
    BOARD
    NOTE,
    third line
    from
    top:
    “Method
    Method”
    change
    to a single
    “Method”.
    6.
    Omission
    onPage235,
    Section
    611.1004(b)(4),
    BOARD
    NOTE:
    last
    full
    line,
    change
    to
    read:
    “. . .Examination
    of
    Water
    and
    Wastewater,
    20’
    edition,
    Method
    9222D
    and
    G”.
    Reason
    for
    change:
    This
    will
    be
    consistent
    with other
    citations
    to
    Standard
    Methods
    and
    the
    federal
    regulation.
    COMMENTS WITH
    RESECT
    TO THE
    BOARD’S
    OPINION
    7.
    On Page
    11,
    in the
    header:
    “Revisions
    to the
    Lead
    and
    Copper
    Rule...”
    add
    611.360
    to
    the
    series
    of
    listings
    as this
    was
    omitted.
    8.
    The
    following
    is
    in response
    to
    questions
    on
    Pages
    10 and
    11
    of the
    Board
    Opinion.
    A.
    Is
    there
    any
    reason the
    Board
    should
    include
    references
    to
    Standard
    Methods
    Online,
    where the
    same
    version
    of the
    Standard
    Method
    is available
    in
    the
    printed
    21st
    edition
    of
    Standard
    Methods,
    considering
    that
    a
    Board
    note
    appended
    to
    the incorporation
    of
    Standard
    Methods
    cites
    to Standard
    Methods
    Online
    for
    purchase
    of individual
    methods?
    Answer:
    The
    Agency
    has
    no
    objections
    to the
    Board proposal.
    B.
    Can
    USEPA,
    the
    Agency,
    or anyone
    in
    the regulated
    community
    provide
    the
    Board
    with
    a
    copy
    of the
    method
    entitled
    “The
    Determination
    of
    Radium-226
    and
    Radium-228
    in
    Drinking
    Water
    by Gamma-ray
    Spectrometry
    Using
    HPGE
    or
    Ge(Li)
    Detectors,” Revision
    1.2,
    December
    2004,
    cited
    by
    USEPA
    as available
    from
    the
    Environmental
    Resources
    Center
    at the
    Georgia
    Institute
    of Technology?
    Answer:
    The
    Agency
    has
    obtained
    a copy
    of the
    Georgia
    Radium
    Method
    from
    US
    EPA
    Region
    V and
    is attaching
    a copy
    of
    that
    document
    with
    these
    comments.
    C.
    Can
    USEPA,
    the
    Agency,
    or anyone
    in the
    regulated
    community
    provide
    the
    Board
    with
    a copy
    of Waters
    Method
    D6508,
    revision
    2, entitled
    “Test Method
    for
    Determination of Dissolved
    Inorganic
    Anions
    in Aqueous
    Matrices
    Using
    Capillary
    Ion
    2

    Electrophoresis
    and Chromate
    Electrolyte,”
    cited
    by
    USEPA as
    available
    from
    Waters
    Corporation?
    Answer:
    The Agency
    received
    correspondence
    (attached)
    from Waters
    Corp.
    regarding
    Waters
    Method
    D6508
    in
    which
    it
    is
    stated,
    the
    INSTRUMENT
    technology
    described
    therein
    (CE/CIA/CIE)
    is
    NO
    LONGER
    AVAILABLE
    from
    Waters,
    having
    been
    discontinued
    in mid-2001,
    and
    obsolete
    at the end
    of 2005.
    For those
    customers
    who
    operate
    an
    existing
    system, the
    Agency
    continues
    to offer
    some of
    the electrolyte
    solutions
    referred
    to in the
    method.”
    Included
    with
    the
    note
    is a copy
    of ASTMD
    6508 —
    00
    which the
    Agency
    takes
    to mean
    Waters Method
    6508.
    D.
    Can or should
    the Board
    substitute
    the
    easily
    located
    method ASTM
    D6508-
    00(2005)e2
    in place of the
    Method
    cited
    as
    Waters
    Method
    D6508,
    revision
    2
    by USEPA,
    which
    the
    Board
    could not
    locate
    from
    the
    listed
    source?
    Answer:
    Based on the
    correspondence
    noted
    in item
    C
    above,
    the Agency
    would
    have
    no objection
    to
    the Board
    adopting
    ASTM D6508-00(2005)e2
    in
    light
    of
    the
    instrumentation
    being discontinued.
    E.
    Did the
    Board
    take
    an
    acceptable
    approach
    to the approved
    equivalent
    methods,
    which
    USEPA
    codified
    as appendix
    A
    to
    40
    C.F.R.
    141, by combining
    them
    with the
    methods
    that
    US
    EPA
    approved by
    rulemaking
    within
    the text
    of the regulations?
    Answer:
    The
    Agency
    believes that
    the
    Board
    has
    taken the
    appropriate
    steps
    by
    incorporating
    the
    equivalent
    methods
    within
    the
    text
    of the regulations.
    COMMENTS
    WITH
    RESPECT
    TO
    SECTION
    611.355
    (A-G)
    9)
    With
    respect
    to the public
    education
    materials
    found
    in Section
    611.355
    (A-G),
    Illinois
    EPA
    respectfully
    disagrees
    with
    language
    proposed
    by the
    Board.
    The
    current
    procedures
    for
    reviewing
    and approving
    public
    education
    (PE) materials
    works
    effectively
    and
    has
    never
    been an issue
    for
    the
    many years
    the
    Agency
    has
    been
    3

    implementing
    the Lead
    and Copper
    Rule.
    The language
    proposed
    by
    the
    Board
    is
    not
    needed
    nor is it
    required
    to be included
    in
    the regulations.
    The
    federal
    regulation
    rightly
    places the burden
    on the Community
    Water
    Supply
    (“CWS”)
    to
    generate
    and distribute
    compliant
    PE materials.
    See
    40
    C.F.R.
    141.85(a)(1)
    and
    (b)(2). When
    the
    Agency
    initially
    notifies
    the
    CWS
    that its
    lead
    action
    level
    has
    been
    exceeded,
    a
    comprehensive
    PE packet
    is sent
    which includes
    a self-assessment
    checklist
    of
    requirements,
    fill-in-the
    blank
    PE template(s),
    and a
    PE-preparation
    guidance
    document.
    The
    CWS prepares
    the
    PE,
    distributes
    the
    materials
    to the
    consumers
    and
    sends
    the
    Agency
    a copy along
    with completed
    forms attesting
    that
    the required
    PE
    requirements
    were
    met.
    As soon
    as time and
    resources
    allow,
    the
    Agency
    reviews
    the
    PE information
    submitted,
    determines
    compliance,
    and issues
    a response
    to
    the
    CWS.
    Due
    to the
    amount
    of information
    initially
    provided to
    the CWS,
    the response
    most
    often
    indicates
    100%
    compliance.
    If
    there are
    minor
    issues, then
    the
    CWS
    can correct
    these
    during any
    repeated
    notices.
    If there
    are
    major issues,
    the
    Agency
    would
    require
    re-issuance.
    The
    language
    proposed
    by the Board
    is shifting
    the
    burden to
    the Agency
    and
    such
    a
    shift
    is
    unnecessary
    and
    burdensome.
    Therefore,
    the
    Agency
    respectfully
    request
    that
    the
    proposed
    language
    in
    Section 61
    1.355(3)(A-G)
    be
    stricken in
    its entirety.
    4

    10)
    As stated
    above,
    the
    Agency
    would
    prefer
    that
    Section
    611.355
    (3)(A-G)
    be
    stricken.
    However,
    if
    that
    is unacceptable
    to
    the
    Board,
    the
    Agency
    offers
    the
    following
    suggestions
    with
    respect
    to
    the language
    proposed
    in 61
    1.355(3)(A-G):
    The
    supplier
    must
    submit
    all written
    public
    education
    materials
    to the
    Agency
    for
    review
    at least
    60
    days
    after
    the
    end of
    the
    sampling
    period.its
    planned
    date
    for
    delivery
    of the
    materials
    to
    the
    public.
    By
    striking
    some
    of
    the
    language
    proposed
    by
    the
    Board
    it
    will allow
    the
    Agency
    a
    tracking
    method
    concerning
    the
    sampling
    periods.
    If
    the Agency
    determines
    that
    the form
    and content
    of
    the
    supplier’s
    written
    public
    education
    materials
    is adequate,
    it may
    issue
    a
    SEP
    pursuant
    to
    Section
    611.110
    that
    expressly
    approves
    the
    materials.
    A
    supplier
    may
    immediately
    distribute
    its
    written
    public
    education
    materials
    after
    receipt
    of a SEP
    or a
    revised
    SEP
    that
    expressly
    approves
    those
    materials.
    If the
    Agency
    determines
    that
    the
    form
    or content
    of
    the
    written
    public
    education
    materials
    submitted
    by
    the
    supplier
    does
    not
    comply
    with
    the
    requirements
    of
    this
    Sections,
    it must
    issue
    a SEP
    pursuant
    to
    Section
    611.110.
    The
    Agency
    may
    issue
    a
    revised
    SEP
    that
    expressly
    supersedes
    a
    SEP
    previously
    issued
    under
    this
    subsection
    (a)(1).
    Any
    SEP
    or
    revised
    SEP
    issued
    by the
    Agency
    must
    identify
    any
    deficiencies
    in the
    written
    public
    education
    materials
    with
    specificity
    sufficient
    to
    guide
    the
    supplier
    to correct
    the
    deficiencies
    in
    a
    way
    that
    would
    address
    the
    Agency’s
    concerns. The revised
    SEP
    shall
    be
    submitted
    to the
    Agency
    within
    30
    days
    after
    being
    notified
    of
    the
    deficiencies.
    )
    The
    Agency
    must
    issue
    any
    SEP
    or
    revised
    SEP
    under
    subsection
    (a)(3)(D)
    of
    this
    Section
    no later
    than
    90
    3f’ days
    after
    the
    date
    on
    which
    it
    received
    a
    copy
    of the
    supplier’s
    prospective
    written
    public
    education
    materials,
    unless
    the
    Agency
    and
    the
    supplier
    have
    agreed
    to
    a later
    date
    pursuant
    to subsection
    (a)(3’KF)
    of
    this Section.
    The
    Agency
    and
    the
    supplier
    may
    agree
    to a
    longer
    time
    within
    which
    the
    Agency
    may
    issue
    a
    SEP
    or
    a
    revised
    SEP,
    in
    which
    case
    the
    Agency
    must
    issue
    the SEP
    or
    revised
    SEP
    before
    expiration
    of
    the
    agreed
    upon
    extension
    agreed
    longer
    time.
    5

    If
    the
    supplier
    has
    not
    received
    a SEP
    from
    the
    Agency
    within
    45
    days
    after the
    date
    on
    which
    the Agency
    received
    its
    written
    public
    education
    material,
    those
    materials
    are
    deemed
    approved,
    and the
    supplier
    may
    immediately
    distribute
    them.
    The
    Agency
    respectfully
    disagrees with
    having
    the
    automatic
    approval
    process
    and
    proposes
    this
    paragraph
    be
    stricken
    altogether.
    This
    language
    is not
    needed
    based
    on the
    Agency’s
    comments
    and
    such
    a requirement
    is
    not found
    in
    the
    federal
    regulations.
    Furthermore,
    the Agency
    is
    of
    the opinion
    that
    US EPA
    may
    not approve
    an automatic
    approval
    based
    on how
    they
    have
    developed
    precise
    content
    and
    delivery
    of the
    PE.
    Also,
    once
    a
    default
    approval
    is
    issued,
    the
    wrong
    information
    is in
    front
    of the
    public
    which
    could
    be contrary
    to the
    actions
    they
    should
    be
    taking.
    Trying
    to
    rescind
    the
    PE would
    only
    lead
    to more
    confusion,
    leading
    to
    a
    delay in
    getting
    the right
    information
    before
    the public
    while
    an
    enforcement case or
    law
    suit
    against
    the
    Agency
    is
    being processed.
    However,
    should
    the
    Board
    determine
    that
    that
    611.355
    (A-G)
    is
    necessary
    and
    that
    an
    automatic
    approval
    is consistent
    with
    the federal
    rules, the
    Agency
    suggest
    a
    longer
    timeframe
    for
    Agency
    review
    before
    an
    automatic
    approval
    is
    granted.
    Once
    the
    supplier
    has
    revised
    its
    written
    public
    education
    materials
    exaçjy
    as described
    by
    the Agency
    in
    a
    SEP
    issued
    under
    subsection
    (a)(3)(D)
    of
    this
    Section,
    those
    materials
    are deemed
    approved,
    and
    the
    supplier
    shall
    may immediately
    proceed
    to distribute
    them.
    6

    11)
    It should
    be
    noted
    that
    if the
    Board
    should
    determine
    that
    an automatic
    approval
    is
    not
    appropriate,
    the
    Agency
    suggest
    that
    that
    last sentence
    in
    611.3
    55(a)(
    1)
    should
    rewritten
    as
    follows:
    The
    supplier
    must
    submit
    all
    written
    public
    education
    materials
    prior
    to
    delivery.
    as
    required
    by
    subsection
    (a)(3)
    of this
    Section.
    12)
    The
    following is the
    Agency
    response
    to
    the
    Board
    request
    for
    comments
    on
    the
    numbered questions
    on Page
    17
    pertaining
    to Section
    611.355(a)(1).
    A.
    Is requiring
    written
    Agency
    action
    only
    where
    the
    Agency
    determines
    that
    deficiencies
    exist
    the
    best
    option
    for
    Agency
    review
    of the
    materials?
    Answer:
    Requiring
    written
    action
    by
    the
    Agency
    only where
    the Agency
    finds
    deficiencies is not
    the best
    option
    to review
    the
    materials.
    The
    Agency
    believes
    that
    approval
    or
    deficiencies should
    be
    addressed
    in writing.
    Currently,
    this
    is how
    the
    Agency
    address
    this
    situations.
    B.
    Is
    the provision
    that
    deems
    the materials
    approved
    and
    which
    allows
    the
    supplier
    to proceed
    and
    distribute
    the materials in
    the absence
    of an
    Agency
    response
    workable?
    Answer:
    The
    Agency
    disagrees
    with
    the
    45
    day
    period
    set
    by
    the Board
    for
    approvals.
    This
    timeframe
    is burdensome
    on
    the
    Agency
    and
    does
    not recognize
    the
    uniqueness
    of
    every
    review.
    Also,
    the
    federal
    regulations
    do
    not require
    a 45
    day
    review.
    C.
    Do
    the
    times
    required
    for
    submission
    to
    the
    Agency
    and
    provided
    for
    Agency
    review
    work
    for the
    purpose?
    Answer:
    The
    Agency
    is
    not
    sure
    the
    time
    line
    for submissions
    to
    the
    Agency
    and
    the
    review
    of
    work
    is doable
    based
    on our
    previous
    comment.
    D.
    Does
    the
    provision
    that
    requires
    the
    Agency
    to describe
    the
    deficiencies
    it
    has
    found
    appear
    adequate
    and
    workable
    to
    assure
    that
    the
    supplier
    is
    given
    a clear
    indication
    of
    those
    deficiencies?
    Answer:
    The
    Agency
    can
    describe
    the deficiencies
    to
    the suppliers.
    7

    E.
    Does
    the requirement
    that allows
    the
    supplier
    to proceed
    and
    distribute
    its
    materials after
    it has
    addressed
    the
    Agency-determined
    deficiencies
    appear
    adequate
    and
    workable
    to
    assure
    that
    the
    Agency
    concerns
    are
    addressed
    and
    that
    publication
    occurs
    as
    rapidly
    as
    possible?
    Answer:
    The
    Agency
    agrees
    with
    the
    requirements
    that
    allows
    the
    supplier
    to
    proceed
    and
    distribute
    the
    materials
    after
    the
    Agency’s
    concerns
    are addressed.
    F.
    Is it necessary
    to set
    forth
    express
    provisions
    for
    Agency
    issuance
    of a
    revised
    SEP,
    and
    does
    such
    an
    express
    provision
    provide
    for
    the
    timeliest
    resolution
    of any
    issues
    that
    might
    arise
    in the
    course
    of Agency
    review
    of a
    supplier’s
    public
    education
    materials?
    Answer:
    The
    Agency
    is
    not
    sure how
    to
    address
    the
    issuance
    of
    a
    revised
    SEP.
    The
    process
    described
    by
    the
    Board
    seems
    confusing,
    so
    it
    would
    probably
    be
    best
    not
    to
    set
    forth
    express
    provision
    concerning
    the
    Agency’s
    review.
    However,
    if the
    Board
    believes
    such
    language
    the
    Agency
    can issue
    a
    revised
    SEP
    but
    it is
    not
    clear
    what
    the
    timelines
    would
    be once
    a
    revision
    is required.
    The
    Agency
    suggestions
    that
    if a
    revision
    is required
    that
    the
    supplier
    make
    the
    necessary
    changes
    within
    30
    days.
    COMMENTS
    WITH
    RESPECT
    TO THE
    BOARD’S
    SEPTEMBER
    4, 2008
    SUPPLEMETNAL
    OPINION
    AND
    ORDER
    13)
    Illinois
    EPA
    notes
    that
    on Page
    22
    of
    the Board’s
    Opinion
    the
    Board
    Note
    should
    be
    changed
    from
    40
    CFR
    141.601(c)
    to
    40 CFR
    141.601(b).
    Respectfully
    submitte
    Stefi
    e
    N.
    Diers
    As
    is
    t Counsel
    Dated:
    November
    7,
    2008
    1021
    North
    Grand
    Avenue
    East
    P.O.
    Box
    19276
    Springfield, Illinois
    62794-9276
    217-782-5544
    8

    ATTACHMENTS

    INTERNATIONAL
    Designation:
    D 6508
    — 00
    (Reapproved
    2005)d1
    Standard
    Test
    Method
    for
    Determination
    of Dissolved
    Inorganic
    Anions
    in
    Aqueous
    Matrices
    Using
    Capillary
    Ion
    Electrophoresis
    and
    Chromate
    Electrolyte’
    This standard
    is
    issued
    under
    the
    fixed designation
    D 6508;
    the number
    immediately
    following
    the designation
    indicates
    the year of
    original adoption
    or, in
    the
    case
    of
    revision,
    the
    year
    of
    last revision.
    A
    number
    in parentheses
    indicates
    the
    year
    of last reapproval.
    A
    superscript
    epsilon
    (e)
    indicates
    an
    editorial change
    since
    the last
    revision
    or
    reapproval.
    e’
    Nom—Warning
    notes were
    moved into
    the text in
    January 2005.
    1. Scope
    1.1
    This test
    method
    cover
    the determination
    of the
    inor
    ganic
    anions
    fluoride,
    bromide,
    chloride,
    nitrite,
    nitrate,
    ortho
    phosphate,
    and
    sulfate
    in
    drinking
    water,
    wastewater,
    and
    other
    aqueous
    matrices
    using
    capillary
    ion
    electrophoresis
    (CIE)
    with
    indirect
    UV
    detection.
    See
    Figs
    .1-6.
    1.2
    The
    test method
    uses a
    chromate-based
    electrolyte
    and
    indirect
    UV
    detection
    at 254
    nm.
    It is applicable
    for
    the
    determination
    or
    inorganic
    anions
    in
    the range
    of 0.1
    to 50
    mg/L
    except
    for fluoride
    whose
    range
    is 0.1 to
    25
    mg/L.
    1.3
    It is
    the
    responsibility
    of the user
    to ensure
    the validity
    of
    this test
    method
    for other
    anion concentrations
    and untested
    aqueous
    matrices.
    NOTE I—The
    highest
    accepted
    anion
    concentration
    submitted
    for
    precision
    and
    bias
    extend the
    anion concentration
    range for
    the following
    anions:
    Chloride
    to
    93
    mgJL,
    Sulfate
    to
    90
    mgIL,
    Nitrate to
    72 mg/L,
    and
    ortho-phosphate
    to 58
    mg/L.
    1.4 This
    standard
    does not
    purport
    to
    address
    all
    of
    the
    safe/v
    concerns,
    if
    any,
    associated
    with
    its
    use. It is
    the
    responsibility
    of
    the
    user of this
    standard
    to
    establish
    appro
    priate safety
    and
    health
    practices
    and
    deterntine
    the
    applica
    bility of
    regulatory
    limitations
    prior
    to use. For
    specific
    hazard
    statements,
    see Section
    9.
    2. Referenced
    Documents
    2.1
    ASTM
    Standards:
    2
    D
    1066
    Practice
    for Sampling
    Steam
    D
    1129
    Tenninology
    Relating
    to Water
    D Il
    93
    Specification
    for
    Reagent
    Water
    D 2777
    Practice
    for Determination
    of
    Precision
    and
    Bias
    of
    This
    test
    method
    is under the
    jurisdiction
    of ASTM
    Committee
    D19 on Water
    and
    is the direct
    responsibility
    of
    Subcommittee
    D19.05
    on
    Inorganic
    Constituents
    in
    water.
    Current
    edition
    approved
    Jan. 1. 2005.
    Published
    April
    2005.
    Originally
    approved
    in
    2000. Last
    previous
    edition
    approved
    in
    2000 as
    D6508—00.
    °
    For
    referenced
    ASTM
    standards,
    visit the
    ASTM
    websile,
    www.astm.org,
    or
    contact
    ASTM Customer
    Service
    at
    aervice@astm.org.
    For Annual
    Book
    of ASTM
    Standards
    volume
    information,
    refer to the
    standard’s Document
    Summary
    page
    on
    the
    ASTM website.
    Applicable
    Test
    Methods
    of
    Committee
    D19
    on
    Water
    D
    337(>
    Practices
    for Sampling
    Water
    from
    Closed
    Conduits
    I)
    3X56
    Guide
    for
    Good
    Laboratory
    Practices
    in
    Laborato
    ries
    Engaged
    in
    Sampling
    and
    Analysis
    of
    Water
    [)58
    10
    Guide
    for
    Spiking
    into
    Aqueous
    Samples
    Copyright ©
    ASTM
    International,
    100
    Barr
    Harbor
    Drive, PC
    Box C700,
    West
    Csnshohocken,
    PA
    19428-2959,
    United States.
    Anion
    Standard in
    mg/I
    1
    Chloride
    = 2
    7
    Fluoride
    = 1
    2
    Bromide = 4
    8
    Formate
    S
    SNitrite
    4
    9Phosptrate4
    4Sulfate
    4
    lOCarbonate
    8
    5 Nitrate
    =
    4
    II
    Acetate
    = 5
    11
    V
    3.000
    3.500
    .
    4,000
    4.500
    Mmutes
    FIG.
    1
    Electropherogram
    of
    Mixed
    Anion Working
    Solution
    and
    Added Common
    Organic
    Acids
    I Chloride
    2
    Bromide
    3 Nitrite
    4
    Sulfate
    5 Nitrate
    6 Fluoride
    7 Phosphate
    FIG. 2
    Electropherogram
    of 0.2
    mgJL Anions
    Used
    to
    Determine
    MDL

    D
    6508
    — 00
    (2005)d1
    - 000
    35O0
    4OO0
    Minutes
    FIG.
    3
    Electropherogram
    of
    Substitute
    Wastewater
    ter
    Anions
    in mqIl_
    No
    Dilution
    I
    Chloride
    93.3
    2
    Nitrite
    = 0.48
    3 Sulfate
    60.3
    4 Nitrate
    = 40.8
    5 Carbonate
    = Natural
    3. Terminology
    3.1
    Definitions—For
    definitions
    of tenns
    used in
    this
    test
    method,
    refer
    to
    Terminology
    D 1129.
    3.2
    Definitions
    of
    Terms
    Specific
    to This
    Standard:
    3.2.1
    capillary
    ion electrophoresis,
    n—an
    electrophoretic
    technique
    in which
    a
    UV-absorbing
    electrolyte
    is
    placed
    in
    a
    50
    im
    to 75
    urn
    fused
    silica
    capillary.
    Voltage
    is
    applied
    across
    the
    capillary
    causing
    electrolyte
    and
    anions
    to
    migrate
    towards
    the
    anode
    and
    through
    the capillary’s
    UV
    detector
    window.
    Anions
    are
    separated
    based
    upon
    the
    their
    differential
    rates
    of
    migra
    tion
    in
    the
    electrical
    field.
    Anion
    detection
    and
    quantitation
    are
    based
    upon
    the
    principles
    of
    indirect
    UV
    detection.
    iso
    0
    3.2.2
    electrolyte,
    n—a
    combination
    of
    a UV-absorbing
    salt
    and
    an electroosmotic
    flow modifier
    placed
    inside
    the
    capillary,
    used
    as
    a
    carrier
    for
    the
    analytes,
    and for
    detection
    and
    quantitation.
    The
    UV-absorbing
    portion
    of
    the salt
    must
    be
    anionic
    and
    have
    an
    electrophoretic
    mobility
    similar
    to
    the
    analyte
    anions
    of
    interest.
    3.2.3
    electroosmotic
    flow
    (EOF,),
    n—the
    direction
    and
    ve
    locity
    of
    electrolyte
    solution
    flow within
    the
    capillary
    under
    an
    applied
    electrical
    potential
    (voltage);
    the velocity
    and
    direction
    of
    flow
    is determined
    by electrolyte
    chemistry,
    capillary
    wall
    chemistry,
    and
    applied
    voltage.
    3.2.4
    electroosinotic
    flow
    modifier
    (OFM,
    n—a
    cationic
    quatemary
    amine
    in
    the
    electrolyte
    that dynamically
    coats
    the
    negatively
    charged
    silica
    wall
    giving
    it a
    net
    positive
    charge.
    This
    reverses
    the
    direction
    of the
    electrolytes
    natural
    dcc
    troosmotic
    flow
    and directs
    it towards
    the
    anode
    and
    detector.
    This
    modifier
    augments
    anion
    migration
    and
    enhances
    speed
    of
    analysis.
    Its
    concentration
    secondarily
    effects
    anion
    selectivity
    and
    resolution,
    (see
    Fig.
    7).
    3.2.5
    electrophoretic
    mobility,
    n—the
    specific
    velocity
    of
    a
    charged
    analyte
    in
    the
    electrolyte
    under
    specific
    electroosmotic
    flow
    conditions.
    The
    mobility
    of
    an analyte
    is
    directly
    related
    to the
    analyte’
    s
    equivalent
    ionic
    conductance
    and
    applied
    voltage,
    and
    is the
    primary
    mechanism
    of
    separation.
    3.2.6
    electrophe,vgrain,
    n—a
    graphical
    presentation
    of
    LIV-
    detector
    response
    versus
    time
    of
    analysis;
    the
    x
    axis
    is
    D
    AnionS
    in
    m/L,
    1:20
    Dilution
    I Chloride
    24.2
    2
    Sulfate
    = 3.77
    3
    Phosphate
    = 0.89
    4 Carbonate
    = Natural
    ii
    D
    Anions
    in
    m/L,
    No
    Dilution
    I Chloride
    = 2.0
    2 Nitrite
    1.6
    3 Sulfate
    = 34.7
    4 Nitrate
    =
    16.5
    3.500
    Minutes
    4.000
    FIG.
    6
    Electropherogram
    of Industrial
    Wastewater
    Anions
    In mg/L,
    No
    Dilution
    I Chlore
    20.2
    2
    Sulfate
    = 7.5
    3 Nitrate
    =1.6
    4 l’luoride
    = 0.06
    5 Carbonate
    = Natural
    3.000
    i,aoo
    4.ooo
    FIG.
    4
    Electropherogram
    of
    Drinking
    Water
    3.000
    3,500
    Minutes
    4.000
    4.500
    FIG.
    5
    Electropherogram of Municipal
    Wastewater
    Treatment
    Plant
    Discharge
    D
    5847
    Practice
    for
    Writing
    Quality
    Control
    Specifications
    for
    Standard
    Test
    Methods
    for
    Water
    Analysis
    D
    5905
    Practice
    for
    the Preparation of Substitute
    Wastewa
    F
    488
    Test
    Method
    for
    On-Site
    Screening
    of
    Heterotrophic
    Bacteria
    in
    Water
    2

    D
    6508 —
    00
    (2005)d1
    Cathode
    //
    “\
    High
    Mobility
    Anion
    c:Dl
    (
    1.0w Mobility
    Anion
    (te)
    I
    I
    I
    Neutrals &
    Water
    \
    J
    <—
    (
    All
    Catlon
    EOF
    >
    \
    J+++++++++++.++++++++.+++÷÷+
    Anode
    Injection
    Side
    /
    U
    0
    \
    Detection
    Side
    L_
    1
    __..___
    jiSLc2i_jiji
    —ji
    0.
    O
    0.
    0
    0.
    O
    0.
    OH
    LL
    +
    +
    +
    +
    L
    +
    N
    FIG. 7
    Pictorial
    Diagram
    of Anion
    Mobility
    and
    ElectroOsomotic
    Flow
    Modifier
    migration
    time, which
    is
    used to
    qualitatively
    identify
    the
    anion,
    and
    the
    y
    axis
    is
    UV
    response,
    which
    can
    be
    converted
    to
    time corrected
    peak
    area
    for quantitation.
    3.2.7 hydrostatic
    sampling,
    n—a
    sample
    introduction
    tech
    nique
    in which
    the
    capillary
    with electrolyte
    is
    immersed
    in the
    sample,
    and
    both
    are
    elevated
    to
    a specific
    height,
    typically
    10
    cm, above
    the
    receiving
    electrolyte
    reservoir
    for
    a preset
    amount
    of
    time,
    typically
    less
    than
    60 s. Nanolitres
    of sample
    are siphoned
    into
    the capillary
    by
    differential
    head pressure
    and
    gravity.
    3.2.8
    indirect
    UV
    detection,
    n—a form
    of
    UV
    detection
    in
    which
    the analyte
    displaces
    an
    equivalent
    net charge
    amount
    of
    the
    highly UV-absorbing
    component
    of
    the electrolyte
    causing
    a
    net
    decrease
    in background
    absorbance.
    The
    magnitude
    of the
    decreased
    absorbance
    is
    directly
    proportional
    to
    analyte
    con
    centration.
    Detector
    output
    polarity
    is
    reversed
    in
    order to
    obtain a
    positive
    mV
    response.
    3.2.9
    midpoint
    of
    peak
    width, n—CIE
    peaks
    typically
    are
    asymmetrical
    with
    the
    peak
    apex
    shifting
    with increasing
    concentration,
    and
    the
    peak apex
    may
    not be
    indicative
    of
    true
    analyte
    migration
    time.
    Midpoint
    of
    peak width
    is
    the midpoint
    between
    the
    analyte
    peak’s start
    and
    stop
    integration,
    or the
    peak
    center
    of gravity.
    3.2.10
    migration
    time,
    n—the
    time
    required
    for a
    specific
    analyte
    to
    migrate
    through
    the
    capillary
    to
    the
    detector.
    The
    migration
    time in
    capillary
    ion
    electrophoresis
    is
    analogous
    to
    retention
    time in
    chromatography.
    3.2.11
    time
    corrected
    peak
    area,
    n—normalized
    peak
    area;
    peak
    area
    divided
    by
    migration
    time.
    CE
    principles
    state that
    peak
    area is
    dependent
    upon
    migration
    time,
    that
    is, for
    the
    same
    concentration
    of
    analyte,
    as migration
    time
    increases
    (decreases)
    peak
    area
    increases
    (decreases).
    Time
    corrected
    peak
    area accounts
    for
    these changes.
    4.
    Summary
    of Test
    Method
    4.1
    Capillary
    ion electrophoresis,
    see
    Figs.
    7-lU,
    is
    a
    free
    zone
    electrophoretic
    technique
    optimized
    for the
    determination
    of
    anions with
    molecular
    weight
    less
    than 200.
    The
    anions
    All
    Cations
    Miaration
    Time
    MT 0
    Hioh
    Mob
    lily
    Low Mohilitv
    MT>7
    mm
    p
    Anions
    Anions
    FIG.
    8 Selectivity
    Diagram
    of
    Anion Mobility
    Using
    Capillary
    Ion
    Electrophoresis
    /AnaMe
    ion (A) c5splaces
    electrolyte
    len (a)
    °
    El Cr01
    e
    yt
    g
    \
    /
    charge ror
    charge
    or
    transfer
    ratio
    causing
    \
    /
    a
    net decrease
    ri background
    abscrbanca.
    g
    \
    /
    The change
    in absorbance
    is
    directly
    \/
    related
    to Analyte
    concentration.
    FIG.
    9
    Pictorial
    Diagram
    of Indirect
    UV Detection
    electrolyte
    when
    an
    electrical
    field
    is applied
    through
    the open
    tubular fused
    silica
    capillary.
    The
    electrolyte’s
    electroosmotic
    low modifier
    dynamically
    coats
    the inner
    wall
    of the
    capillary
    changing
    the
    surface
    to
    a net positive
    charge. This
    reversal
    of
    wall charge
    reverses
    the
    natural
    EOE
    The modified
    EOF
    in
    Inorganic
    Divalent
    Anions
    Org
    Acids.
    Monovalent
    Water
    Cl. Br.
    Oxymetals.
    Organic
    and
    All
    NO..
    SQ
    4
    F.
    P0
    3
    .
    Acids
    Neutral
    NO,
    ClO
    Ci0
    3
    ,
    C
    2 thru
    C
    5
    Organics
    SQ,
    S
    203
    Formate
    tie
    e
    tie
    A
    A
    A e
    tie
    tie
    e
    e
    ee
    eeeeeAAAAeeeeee
    tie
    eeeeeeAAAAe
    tie ee
    tie
    e
    e
    eeeeAAAAee
    tie
    eeee
    migrate
    and
    are
    separated
    according
    to
    their
    mobility
    in
    the
    combination
    with
    a
    negative
    power supply
    augments
    the

    D
    6508
    — 00
    (2005)E1
    Capillary
    with
    Polyimlde
    Coating
    Removed,
    Cell
    Window
    UV Detector
    at
    254
    nm
    FIG.
    10 General
    Hardware
    Schematic
    of
    a
    Capillary
    Ion
    Electrophoresis
    System
    mobility
    of the analyte
    anions
    towards
    the
    anode
    and
    detector
    achieving
    rapid
    analysis
    times.
    Cations
    migrate
    in the opposite
    direction
    towards
    the
    cathode
    and are removed
    from
    the sample
    during
    analysis.
    Water
    and
    other
    neutral
    species
    move toward
    the
    detector
    at the
    same
    rate
    as the EOF.
    The
    neutral
    species
    migrate
    slower than
    the
    analyte
    anions
    and
    do
    not interfere
    with
    anion
    analysis
    (see
    Figs.
    7 and
    8).
    4.2 The
    sample
    is
    introduced
    into
    the
    capillary
    using
    hydro
    static
    sampling.
    The
    inlet of
    the capillary
    containing
    electrolyte
    is
    inrnersed
    in the
    sample
    and the
    height
    of
    the sample
    raised
    10 cm
    for 30
    s
    where
    low
    nanolitre
    volumes
    are siphoned
    into
    the
    capillary.
    After
    sample
    loading,
    the
    capillary
    is immediately
    immersed
    back
    into
    the
    electrolyte.
    The
    voltage
    is applied
    initiating
    the
    separation
    process.
    4.3
    Anion
    detection
    is based
    upon
    the princip]es
    of
    indirect
    UV
    detection.
    The
    UV-absorbing
    electrolyte
    anion is displaced
    charge-for-charge
    by
    the
    separated
    analyte
    anion.
    The
    analyte
    anion
    zone
    has
    a net
    decrease
    in background
    absorbance.
    This
    decrease
    in
    UV
    absorbance
    in quantitatively
    proportional
    to
    analyte
    anion
    concentration
    (see
    Fig.
    9).
    Detector
    output
    polarity
    is
    reversed
    to provide
    positive
    mV response
    to
    the data
    system,
    and
    to
    make
    the
    negative
    absorbance
    peaks
    appear
    positive.
    4.4
    The
    analysis
    is complete
    once
    the last
    anion of
    interest
    is
    detected.
    The
    capillary
    is
    vacuum
    purged
    automatically
    by
    the
    system
    of
    any
    remaining
    sample
    and replenished
    with
    fresh
    electrolyte.
    The
    system
    now is
    ready
    for
    the
    next
    analysis.
    5.
    Significance
    and Use
    5.1
    Capillary
    ion
    electrophoresis
    provides
    a simultaneous
    separation
    and
    determination
    of
    several
    inorganic
    anions
    using
    nanolitres
    of
    sample
    in a
    single
    injection.
    All
    anions
    present in
    the
    sample
    matrix
    will be
    visualized
    yielding
    an anionic
    profile
    of
    the sample.
    5.2
    Analysis
    time is
    less than
    5 minutes
    with
    sufficient
    sensitivity
    for
    drinking
    water and
    wastewater
    applications.
    Time
    between
    samplings
    is
    less than
    seven
    minutes
    allowing
    for
    high
    sample
    throughput.
    5.3
    Minimal
    sample
    preparation
    is
    necessary
    for
    drinking
    water
    and
    wastewater
    matrices.
    Typically,
    only
    a dilution
    with
    water is
    needed.
    5.4
    This test
    method
    is intended
    as
    an alternative
    to
    other
    multi-analyte
    methods
    and various
    wet
    chemistries
    for
    the
    detennination
    of
    inorganic
    anions in
    water and
    wastewater.
    Compared
    to other
    multi-analyte
    methods
    the major
    benefits
    of
    CIE
    are
    speed
    of
    analysis,
    simplicity,
    and
    reduced
    reagent
    consumption
    and operating
    costs.
    6.
    Interferences
    6.1
    Analyte
    identification,
    quantitation,
    and
    possible
    comi
    gration
    occur
    when
    one anion
    is in significant
    excess
    to
    other
    anions
    in the
    sample matrix.
    For
    two
    adjacent
    peaks,
    reliable
    quantitation
    can
    be
    achieved
    when the
    concentration
    differen
    tial is
    less than
    100:1.
    As the resolution
    between
    two
    anion
    peaks
    increase
    so does
    the tolerated
    concentration
    differential.
    In samples
    containing
    1000 rng/L
    Cl,
    1 mg/L
    SO
    4
    can
    be
    resolved
    and quantitated,
    however,
    the
    high
    Cl
    will
    interfere
    with
    Br and NO
    2
    quantitation.
    6.2
    Dissolved
    carbonate,
    detected
    as HC0
    3
    ’,
    is
    an
    anion
    present
    in
    all aqueous
    samples,
    especially
    alkaline
    samples.
    Carbonate
    concentrations
    greater
    than
    500 mg/L
    will
    interfere
    with
    P0
    4
    quantitation.
    6.3 Monovalent
    organic
    acids,
    except
    for
    formate,
    and
    neutral
    organics
    commonly
    found
    in wastewater
    migrate
    later
    in
    the electropherogram,
    after
    carbonate,
    and
    do
    not
    interfere.
    Formate,
    a common
    organic
    acid
    found
    in
    environmental
    samples,
    migrates
    shortly
    after
    fluoride
    but
    before
    phosphate.
    Formate
    concentrations
    greater
    than
    5 mg/L
    will
    interfere
    with
    fluoride
    identification
    and
    quantitation.
    Inclusion
    of
    2
    mg/L
    formate
    into
    the mixed
    anion
    working
    solution
    aids
    in
    fluoride
    and formate
    identification
    and quantitation.
    6.4
    Divalent
    organic
    acids
    usually
    found
    in
    wastewater
    migrate
    after
    phosphate.
    At high
    concentrations,
    greater
    than
    10
    mg/L,
    they
    may interfere
    with
    phosphate
    identification
    and
    quantitation.
    Constant
    Temperature
    Compartment,
    25-30°C
    Silica
    Capillary
    .———.
    •._i--...
    7
    tandards
    E
    Vaccum
    Purge
    Mechanism
    I
    lectrolyte
    High
    Voltage
    UPIY
    4

    D
    6508 — 00
    (2005)d1
    6.5
    Chlorate
    also migrates
    after phosphate
    and
    at concen
    trations
    greater
    than
    10
    mg/L
    will interfere
    with
    phosphate
    identification
    and
    quantitation.
    Inclusion
    of 5 mgfL
    chlorate
    into
    the
    mixed
    anion working
    solution
    aids in phosphate
    and
    chlorate
    identification
    and quantitation.
    6.6 As
    analyte concentration
    increases,
    analyte
    peak shape
    becomes
    asymmetrical.
    If
    adjacent
    analyte
    peaks
    are not
    baseline
    resolved,
    the data system
    will drop
    a
    perpendicular
    between
    them
    to
    the baseline.
    This causes
    a
    decrease
    in
    peak
    area
    for both analyte
    peaks
    and
    a low bias for
    analyte
    amounts.
    For
    optimal
    quantitation,
    insure
    that
    adjacent
    peaks
    are
    fully
    resolved,
    if
    they are not,
    dilute
    the
    sample
    1:1 with
    water.
    7.
    Apparatus
    7.1 C’apillaiy
    Ion Electrophoresis
    System—the
    system
    con
    sists
    of the following
    components,
    as shown
    in
    Fig. it)
    or
    equivalent:
    7.1.1 High
    Voltage Power
    Supply, capable
    of
    generating
    voltage
    (potential)
    between
    0 and
    minus
    30 kV relative
    to
    ground
    with
    the
    capability
    working
    in
    a constant
    current
    mode.
    7.1.2
    C’overed
    Sample
    Carousel,
    to
    prevent
    environmental
    contamination
    of the samples
    and
    electrolytes
    during
    a multi-
    sample
    batch analysis.
    7.1.3
    Sample
    Introduction
    Mechanism,
    capable
    of hydro
    static
    sampling
    technique, using
    gravity, positive
    pressure, or
    equivalent.
    7.1.4
    Capillary
    Purge
    Mechanism,
    to
    purge
    the
    capillary
    after
    every
    analysis with
    fresh
    electrolyte
    to eliminate
    any
    interference
    from the previous
    sample
    matrix, and
    to clean
    the
    capillary
    with other reagent,
    such as
    sodium hydroxide.
    7.1.5
    UV Detector,
    having
    the capability
    of
    monitoring
    254
    nm, or equivalent,
    with
    a
    time constant
    of
    0.3
    s.
    7.1.6 Fused
    Silica
    Capillary—A
    75
    im
    (inner
    diameter)
    x
    375
    pm (outer diameter)
    x
    60 cm (length)
    having
    a
    polymer
    coating
    for flexibility,
    and
    noncoated
    section
    to
    act as
    the cell
    window
    for
    UV detection.
    3
    7.1.7
    C’onstant
    Temperature
    Cotnpartment—To
    keep
    the
    samples,
    capillary,
    and
    electrolytes
    at constant
    temperature.
    7.2
    Data
    System—A
    computer
    system that
    can
    acquire
    data
    at 20
    points/s minimum,
    express
    migration time
    in minutes
    to
    three
    decimal places,
    use
    midpoint
    of the analyte
    peak
    width,
    or center
    of gravity,
    to
    determine
    the analyte
    migration
    time,
    use
    normalized
    migration
    times
    with respect
    to a reference
    peak
    for qualitative
    identification,
    use time corrected
    peak
    area
    response
    for analyte
    quantitation,
    and express
    results
    in con
    centration
    units.
    3
    NOTE
    2—It
    is recommended
    that
    integrators
    or
    standard
    chromato
    graphic
    data
    processing
    not be
    used with this
    test method.
    7.3 Anion
    Exchange
    Cartridges
    in the Hydroxide
    Form.
    3
    4
    7.4 Plastic
    Syringe, 20-mL,
    disposable.
    The sole
    source
    of
    supply
    of
    the
    apparatus known
    to the committee
    at this
    time
    is
    Waters
    Corp.,
    34
    Maple St.,
    Milford,
    MA 01757. If
    you are
    aware
    of alternative
    suppliers,
    please
    provide
    this
    information
    to ASTM
    International
    l-leadquarters.
    Your comments
    will receive
    careful
    consideration
    at a meeting
    of
    the responsible
    technical
    committee
    ,
    which
    you
    may
    attend.
    The sole source
    of
    supply of the
    apparatus
    known
    to
    the
    committee
    at this time
    is Alltech
    Associates,
    P/N
    30254, 2051
    Wsukegan
    Rd.,
    Deerfield,
    IL,
    60015.
    7.5
    Vacuum
    Filtration Apparatus,
    capable
    for
    filtering
    100
    mL of
    reagent
    through
    a
    0.45
    pm
    aqueous
    filter.
    8.
    Reagents
    and
    Materials
    8.1 Purity
    of Reagents—Unless
    otherwise
    indicated,
    it
    is
    intended
    that all
    reagents
    shall
    conform
    to the
    reagent
    grade
    specification
    of the Analytical
    Reagents
    of the
    American
    Chemical
    Society,
    where
    such
    specifications
    are
    available.
    5
    Other
    grades
    may be used,
    provided
    it is first
    ascertained
    that
    the
    reagent
    is
    of sufficient high
    purity
    to permit
    its
    use
    without
    lessening
    the
    performance
    or accuracy
    of
    the
    determination.
    Reagent
    chemicals
    shall
    be
    used for
    all tests.
    NOTE
    3—Calibration
    and detection
    limits
    of this test
    method
    are biased
    by
    the purity
    of
    the reagents.
    8.2
    Purity
    of Water—Unless
    otherwise
    indicated,
    references
    to
    water shall
    be understood
    to mean
    Type
    I
    reagent
    water
    conforming
    or exceeding
    specification
    1)
    1193.
    Freshly
    drawn
    water
    should
    be
    used
    for preparation
    of
    all
    stock
    and
    working
    standards,
    electrolytes,
    and solutions.
    6
    Performance
    and detec
    tion
    limits
    of this
    test method
    are
    limited
    by
    the
    purity
    of
    reagent
    water,
    especially
    TOC.
    8.3 Reagent
    Blank—Reagent
    water,
    or any
    other
    solution,
    used to
    preserve
    or dilute the
    sample.
    8.4 Individual
    Anion Solution,
    Stock
    NOTE 4—It
    is
    suggested
    that
    certified
    individual
    1000
    mg/L
    anion
    standards
    be purchased for
    use
    with this
    test method.
    NOTE
    5—All
    weights
    given
    are for anhydrous
    or
    dried
    salts.
    Reagent
    purity
    must
    be accounted
    for in order
    to calculate
    true value
    concentration.
    Certify
    against NIST traceable
    standards.
    8.4.1
    Bromide
    Solution,
    Standard
    (1.0
    mL
    = 1.00
    nag
    Bromnide)—Dry
    approximately
    0.5
    g
    of
    sodium
    bromide
    (NaBr)
    for
    6
    h
    at
    150°C and cool
    in
    a
    desiccator.
    Dissolve
    0.128
    g
    of the
    dry salt
    in a 100 mL
    volumetric
    flask
    with
    water,
    and fill
    to mark with
    water.
    8.4.2
    Chloride
    Solution,
    Standard (1.0
    ,nL
    =
    1.00
    mg
    Chloride)—Dry
    approximately
    0.5
    g
    of
    sodium
    chloride
    (NaCl) for
    1
    h at
    100°C and
    cool
    in
    a
    desiccator.
    Dissolve
    0.165
    g
    of
    the
    dry
    salt in
    a
    100
    mL a volumetric
    flask
    with
    water, and
    fill
    to mark
    with
    water.
    8.4.3 Fluoride
    Solution,
    Standard
    (1.0
    niL
    1.00
    mg
    Fluoride)—Dry
    approximately
    0.5
    g
    of sodium
    fluoride
    (NaF)
    for
    1 h at
    100°C and
    cool
    in
    a desiccator.
    Dissolve
    0.22
    1
    g
    of
    the dry salt
    in a 100
    mL volumetric
    flask
    with
    water,
    and fill
    to
    mark with
    water.
    8.4.4
    Formate
    Solution,
    Standard (1.0
    mnL
    =
    1.00
    mg
    Formate)—Dissolve
    0.151
    g
    of sodium
    formate
    in
    a
    100-mL
    volumetric
    flask
    with water,
    and
    fill
    to
    mark
    with
    water.
    Reagent
    Chemicals,
    American Chemicat
    Society
    Specifications,
    Am.
    Chem.
    Soc., Washington,
    DC.
    For suggestions
    on the testing
    of reagents
    not
    listed
    by
    the
    American
    Chemical Society,
    see
    A,ialar
    Standards far
    Laborata?y
    Chemicals,
    BDH
    Ltd.,
    Poole, Dorset,
    U.K., and
    the
    United
    States
    Pharmacopeia
    and
    National
    Formuirny,
    U.S.
    Pharmacopoeia
    Convention,
    Inc.
    (USPC),
    Rockville,
    Md.
    Although
    the
    reagent water
    may exceed
    Specification
    1)
    1193.
    the
    reagent
    water
    needs
    to be periodically
    tested
    for bacterial contamination.
    Bacteria
    and their
    waste
    products
    may adversely
    affect
    system
    performance.
    As
    a
    guide,
    ASTM
    Type
    IA
    water
    specifies
    a total bacteria
    count of 10 colonies/L.
    Refer
    to Test
    Method
    F
    455
    for analysis
    procedure.
    5

    I111Jfr
    D
    6508
    00
    (2005)1
    8.4.5
    Nitrate
    Solution,
    Standard
    (1.0
    mL =
    1.00
    ing
    Nitrate)—Dry
    approximately
    0.5
    g
    of
    sodium
    nitrate
    (NaNO
    3
    )
    for 48
    h at 105°C
    and
    cool
    in
    a desiccator.
    Dissolve
    0.137
    g
    of
    the
    dry
    salt in
    a 100-niL
    volumetric
    flask
    with
    water,
    and
    fill
    to
    mark
    with
    water.
    8.4.6
    Nitrite
    Solution,
    Standard
    (1.0
    mL
    = 1.00
    nig
    Nitrite)—Dry
    approximately
    0.5
    g
    of sodium
    nitrite
    (NaNO
    2
    )
    for
    24
    h in a
    desiccator
    containing
    concentrated
    sulfuric
    acid.
    Dissolve
    0.150
    g
    of
    the
    dry
    salt in
    a
    100-mL
    volumetric
    flask
    with
    water,
    and fill
    to
    mark
    with
    water.
    Store
    in a
    sterilized
    glass
    bottle.
    Refrigerate
    and
    prepare
    monthly.
    NOTE
    6—Nitrite
    is
    easily
    oxidized,
    especially
    in
    the
    presence
    of
    moisture.
    Use
    only
    fresh
    reagent.
    NOTE
    7—Prepare
    sterile
    bottles
    for
    storing
    nitrite
    solutions
    by
    heating
    for
    1 h
    at 170°C
    in
    an air
    oven.
    8.4.7
    Ortho-Phosphate
    Solution,
    Standard
    (1.0
    ,nL
    = 1.00
    mg
    o-Phosphate)—Dissolve
    0.150
    g
    of
    anhydrous
    dibasic
    sodium
    phosphate
    (Na
    2
    HPO
    4
    )
    in
    a
    100-mL
    volumetric
    flask
    with
    water,
    and
    fill to
    mark
    with
    water.
    8.4.8
    Sulfate
    Solution,
    Standard
    (1.0 ,nL
    =
    1.00
    mg
    Sulfate)—Dry approximately
    0.5
    g
    of
    anhydrous
    sodium
    sul
    fate
    (Na
    2
    SO
    4
    )
    for 1
    h
    at 110°C
    and
    cool
    in a
    dessicator.
    Dissolve
    0.148
    g
    of
    the
    dry salt
    in
    a
    l00-mL
    volumetric
    flask
    with
    water,
    and
    fill to
    mark
    with
    water.
    8.5
    Mixed
    Anion
    Solution,
    Working—Prepare
    at least
    three
    different
    working
    standard
    concentrations
    for
    the
    analyte
    anions
    of
    interest
    bracketing
    the
    desired
    range
    of
    analysis,
    typically
    between
    0.1
    and
    50 mgIL,
    and
    add
    2
    mg/L
    formate
    to
    all
    standards.
    Add
    an appropriate aliquot
    of Individual
    anion
    stock solution
    (see 8.4)
    to a prerinsed
    100-mL
    volumetric
    flask,
    and
    dilute
    to
    100
    mL
    with
    water.
    NOTE 8—Use
    100
    1
    .iL of Individual
    anion
    stock solution
    (see
    g.4)
    per
    100
    mL
    for 1
    mgIL
    anion.
    NOTE
    9—Anions
    of
    no
    interest
    may be
    omitted.
    NOTE
    10—The
    midrange
    mixed
    anion
    solution,
    working
    may
    be used
    for
    the
    determination
    of
    migration
    times
    and resolution
    described
    in
    12.1.
    8.6
    C’alibration Verification
    Solution
    (CVS)—A
    solution
    formulated
    by
    the
    laboratory
    of
    mixed
    analytes
    of
    known
    concentration
    prepared
    in water.
    The
    CVS
    solution
    must
    be
    prepared
    from
    a
    different
    source
    to
    the
    calibration
    standards.
    8.7
    Petformance
    Evaluation
    Solution
    (PES)—A
    solution
    formulated
    by
    an
    independent
    source
    of
    mixed
    analytes
    of
    known
    concentration
    prepared
    in
    water.
    Ideally,
    the
    PBS
    solution
    should
    be
    purchased
    from
    an
    independent
    source.
    8.8
    Quality
    Control
    Solution
    (QCS)—A
    solution
    of
    known
    analyte
    concentrations added
    to a
    synthetic
    sample
    matrix
    such
    as
    substitute
    wastewater
    that
    sufficiently
    challenges
    the test
    method.
    8.9
    Buffer
    Solution (100
    mM C’HES/l
    mM
    Calcium
    Gluconate)—Dissolve
    20.73
    g
    of
    CHES
    (2-EN-
    Cyclohexylamino]-Ethane
    Sulfonic
    Acid)
    and
    0.43
    g
    of cal
    cium
    gluconate
    in a I -L
    volumetric
    flask
    with
    water,
    and dilute
    to I
    L
    with
    water.
    This
    concentrate
    may
    be stored
    in
    a
    capped
    glass
    or
    plastic
    container
    for up
    to
    one
    year.
    8.10
    C’hromate
    Concentrate
    Solution
    (100
    mM
    Sodium
    Chroniate)—Dissolve
    23.41
    g
    of
    sodium
    chromate
    tetrahydrate
    (Na
    2
    CrO
    4
    .4
    H
    2
    0)
    in a
    1-L
    volumetric
    flask
    with
    water,
    and
    dilute
    to I
    L with
    water.
    This concentrate
    may
    be
    stored
    in
    a
    capped
    glass
    or
    plastic
    container
    for
    up
    to
    one
    year.
    8.11
    OFM
    ‘oncentrate
    Solution
    (100
    mM
    Tetradecyltrim
    ethyl
    Animonium
    Bromide)—Dissolve
    33.65
    g
    of
    Tetradecylt
    rimethyl
    Ammonium
    Bromide
    (TFABr)
    in
    a
    I -L
    volumetric
    flask
    with
    water,
    and
    dilute
    to
    1 L
    with
    water.
    Store
    this
    solution
    in a
    capped
    glass
    or
    plastic
    container
    for
    up to
    one
    year.
    NOTE 1
    l—TTABr
    needs
    to
    be
    converted
    to
    the
    hydroxide
    form
    (FfAOH)
    for
    use
    with
    this test
    method.
    TfAOH
    is
    commercially
    available
    as 100 mM
    TFAOH,
    which
    is
    an
    equivalent
    substitute.
    8.12
    Sodium
    Hydroxide
    Solution
    (500
    mM
    Sodium
    Hydroxide)—Dissolve
    20
    g
    of
    sodium
    hydroxide
    (NaOH)
    in
    a
    1-L
    plastic
    volumetric
    flask
    with
    water,
    and
    dilute
    to
    1
    L with
    water.
    8.13
    Electrolyte
    Solution,
    Working
    (4.7
    mM
    C’hromate/4
    mM
    ?TAOH/10
    mM
    CHES/0.1
    mM
    Calcium
    Gluconate)
    3
    7
    Wash
    the anion
    exchange
    cartridge
    in the
    hydroxide
    form
    (see
    7.3)
    using
    the
    20-mL
    plastic
    syringe
    (see
    7.4)
    with
    10
    ml..
    of
    500mM
    NaOH
    (see
    8.12)
    followed
    by
    10
    mL
    of water.
    Discard
    the washings.
    Slowly
    pass
    4-mi..
    of
    the 100
    mM
    TTABr
    solution
    (see
    8.11)
    through
    the
    cartridge
    into
    a
    lOO-mL
    volumetric
    flask.
    Rinse
    the
    cartridge
    with
    20
    mL
    of
    water,
    adding
    the washing
    to
    the
    volumetric
    flask.
    NOTE 12—The
    above
    procedure
    is
    used
    to
    convert
    the
    Tl’ABr
    to
    TI’AOH,
    which
    is
    used
    in the
    electrolyte.
    If
    using
    commercially
    available
    100 mM
    TTAOH,
    the
    above conversion
    step
    is
    not necessary;
    substitute
    4
    mL
    of 100
    mM
    TTAOH
    and continue
    below.
    8.13.1
    Into
    the
    100-mi..
    volumetric
    flask
    add
    4.7
    mL
    of
    chrornate
    concentrate
    solution
    (see
    8.10)
    and
    10
    mL
    of buffer
    solution
    (see
    8.9).
    Mix
    and dilute
    to
    100
    mL
    with
    water.
    The
    natural
    pH
    of the
    electrolyte
    should
    be
    9
    ±
    0.1.
    Filter
    and
    degas
    using
    the
    vacuum
    filtration
    apparatus.
    Store
    the
    any
    remaining
    electrolyte
    in
    a capped
    glass
    or
    plastic
    container
    at
    ambient
    temperature.
    The
    electrolyte
    is stable
    for
    one
    year.
    9.
    Precautions
    9.1
    Chemicals
    used
    in
    this test
    method
    are
    typical
    of many
    useful
    laboratory
    chemicals,
    reagents,
    and
    cleaning
    solutions,
    which
    can be
    hazardous
    if
    not handled
    properly.
    Refer
    to
    Guide
    0
    3856.
    9.2
    It
    is the
    responsibility
    of the
    user to
    prepare,
    handle,
    and
    dispose
    of chemical
    solutions
    in accordance
    with
    all
    applicable
    federal,
    state, and
    local
    regulations.
    (Warning—This
    capillary
    electrophoresis
    method
    uses
    high
    voltage
    as
    a
    means
    for
    separating
    the
    analyte
    anions,
    and
    can
    be
    hazardous
    if not
    used
    properly.
    Use
    only
    those
    instruments
    that have
    all proper
    safety
    features.)
    10.
    Sampling
    10.1
    Collect
    samples
    in
    accordance
    with
    Practice
    D
    3:370.
    10.2
    Rinse
    sample
    containers
    with sample
    and
    discard
    to
    eliminate
    any
    contamination
    from
    the
    container.
    Fill
    to
    over
    flowing
    and cap
    to exclude
    air.
    The
    sole source
    of supply
    of the
    apparatus
    known
    to the
    committee
    at
    this
    time
    is
    Waters
    Coip..
    34 Maple
    St., Milford,
    MA
    01757,
    as tonSelect
    High
    MobilityA
    nion Electrolyte,
    P/N 49385..
    6

    411Jfr
    D
    6508
    00
    (2005)E1
    10.3
    Analyze
    samples,
    as
    soon
    as
    possible,
    after
    collection.
    For
    nitrite,
    nitrate,
    and
    phosphate
    refrigerate
    the
    sample
    at
    4°C
    after
    collection.
    Warm
    to
    room
    temperature
    before
    dilution
    and
    analysis.
    10.4
    At
    the
    laboratory,
    filter
    samples
    containing
    suspended
    solids
    through
    a
    prerinsed
    0.45
    pm
    aqueous
    compatible
    mem
    brane
    filter
    before
    analysis.
    10.5
    If
    sample
    dilution
    is
    required
    to
    remain
    within
    the
    scope
    of
    this
    test
    method,
    dilute
    with
    water
    only.
    11.
    Preparation
    of
    Apparatus
    11.1
    Set
    up
    the
    CE
    and
    data
    system
    according
    to
    the
    manufacturer’s
    instructions.
    11.2
    Program
    the
    CE
    system
    to
    maintain
    a
    constant
    tem
    perature
    of
    25
    ±
    0.5°C,
    or
    5°C
    above
    ambient
    laboratory
    temperature.
    Fill
    the
    electrolyte
    reservoirs
    with
    fresh
    chromate
    electrolyte
    working
    solution
    (see
    8.13),
    and
    allow
    10
    minutes
    for
    thermal
    equilibration.
    11.3
    Condition
    a
    new
    capability
    (see
    7.1,6)
    with
    500mM
    NaOH
    solution
    (see
    8.12)
    for
    5
    minutes
    followed
    by
    water
    for
    5
    minutes.
    Purge
    the
    capillary
    with
    electrolyte
    (see
    8.13)
    for
    3
    minutes.
    11.4
    Apply
    15
    kV
    of
    voltage
    and
    test
    for
    current.
    The
    current
    should
    be
    14
    ±
    1
    pA.
    If
    no
    current
    is
    observed,
    then
    there
    is
    a
    bubble,
    or
    blockage,
    or
    both,
    in
    the
    capillary.
    Degas
    the
    chrornate
    electrolyte
    working
    solution
    and
    retry.
    If
    still
    no
    current,
    replace
    the
    capillary.
    11.5
    Set
    the
    UV
    detector
    to
    254
    nm
    detection,
    or
    equivalent.
    Zero
    the
    detector
    to
    0.000
    absorbance.
    UV
    offset
    is
    less
    than
    0.1
    AU.
    11.6
    Program
    the
    CE
    system
    for
    constant
    current
    of
    14
    pA.
    11.7
    Program
    the
    CE
    system
    for
    a
    hydrostatic
    sampling
    of
    30
    s.
    Approximately
    37
    nL
    of
    sample
    is
    siphoned
    into
    the
    capillary.
    Different
    sampling
    times
    may
    be
    used
    provided
    that
    the
    samples
    and
    standards
    are
    analyzed
    identically.
    11.8
    Program
    the
    CE
    system
    for
    1
    minute
    purge
    with
    the
    chromate
    electrolyte
    working
    solution
    between
    each
    analysis.
    Using
    a
    15
    psi
    vacuum
    purge
    mechanism,
    one
    60-cm
    capillary
    volume
    can
    be
    displaced
    in
    30
    s.
    11.9
    Program
    the
    data
    system
    for
    an
    acquisition
    rate
    of
    at
    least
    20
    points/s.
    Program
    the
    data
    system
    to
    identify
    analyte
    peaks
    based
    upon
    normalized
    migration
    time
    using
    Cl
    as
    the
    reference
    peak,
    and
    to
    quantitate
    analyte
    peak
    response
    using
    time
    corrected
    peak
    area.
    NOTE
    13—Under
    the
    analysis
    conditions
    Cl
    is
    always
    the
    first
    peak
    in
    the
    electropherogram,
    and
    can
    be
    used
    as
    migration
    time
    reference
    peak.
    12.
    Calibration
    12.1
    Determination
    of
    Migration
    Times
    (Calibrate
    Daily)—
    The
    migration
    time
    of
    an
    anion
    is
    dependent
    upon
    the
    electrolyte
    composition,
    pH,
    capillary
    surface
    and
    length,
    applied
    voltage,
    the
    ionic
    strength
    of
    the
    sample,
    and
    tempera
    ture.
    For
    every
    fresh
    electrolyte
    determine
    the
    analyte
    migra
    tion
    time,
    in
    mm
    to
    the
    third
    decimal
    place,
    of
    the
    midrange
    mixed
    anion
    standard
    working
    solution
    (see
    8.5),
    described
    in
    Section
    11.
    Use
    the
    midpoint
    of
    analyte
    peak
    width
    as
    the
    determinant
    of
    analyte
    migration
    time.
    NOTE
    l4—Analyte
    peak
    apex
    may
    be
    used
    as
    the
    migration
    time
    detemiinant,
    but
    potential
    analyte
    misidentification
    may
    result
    with
    asymmetrical
    peak
    shape
    at
    high
    analyte
    concentrations.
    12.2
    Analyze
    the
    blank
    (see
    8.3)
    and
    at
    least
    three
    working
    mg/L
    solutions
    (see
    8.5),
    using
    the
    set-up
    described
    in
    Section
    11.
    For
    each
    anion
    concentration
    (X-axis)
    plot
    time
    corrected
    peak
    area
    response
    (Y-axis).
    Determine
    the
    best
    linear
    calibra
    tion
    line
    through
    the
    data
    points,
    or
    use
    the
    linear
    regression
    calibration
    routine
    (linear
    through
    zero)
    available
    in
    the
    data
    system.
    NOTE
    15—Do
    not
    use
    peak
    height
    for
    calibration.
    Peak
    area
    is
    directly
    related
    to
    migration
    time,
    that
    is.
    for
    the
    same
    analyte
    concentration,
    increasing
    migration
    time
    give
    increasing
    peak
    area.
    12.2.1
    The
    r
    2
    (coefficient
    of
    determination)
    values
    should
    be
    greater
    than
    0.995;
    typical
    r
    2
    values
    obtained
    from
    the
    inter-
    laboratory
    collaborative
    are
    given
    in
    Table
    A2.
    1.
    12.3
    Calibrate
    daily
    and
    with
    each
    change
    in
    electrolyte,
    and
    validate
    by
    analyzing
    the
    CVS
    solution
    (see8.6)
    according
    to
    procedure
    in
    16.4.
    12.4
    After
    validation
    of
    linear
    multiple
    point
    calibration,
    a
    single
    point
    calibration
    solution
    can
    be
    used
    between
    0.1
    and
    50
    mg/L
    for
    recalibration
    provided
    the
    quality
    control
    require
    ments
    in
    16.4
    are
    met.
    13.
    Procedure
    13.1
    Dilute
    the
    sample,
    if
    necessary
    with
    water,
    to
    remain
    within
    the
    scope
    (see
    i
    .2
    and
    1.3)
    and
    calibration
    of
    this
    test
    method.
    Refer
    to
    Al
    .5.1.
    13.2
    Analyze
    all
    blanks
    (see
    8.3),
    standards
    (see
    8.5),
    and
    samples
    as
    described
    in
    Section
    11
    using
    the
    quality
    control
    criteria
    described
    in
    16.5-16.9.
    Refer
    to
    Figs.
    1-6
    for
    represen
    tative
    anion
    standard,
    detection
    limit
    standard,
    substitute
    wastewater,
    drinking
    water,
    and
    wastewater
    electrophero
    grams.
    13.3
    Analyze
    all
    blanks,
    calibration
    standards,
    samples,
    and
    quality
    control
    solutions
    in
    singlicate.
    13.3.1
    Optional—Duplicate
    analyses
    are
    preferred
    due
    to
    short
    analysis
    times.
    NOTE
    16—Collaborative
    data
    was
    acquired,
    submitted
    and
    evaluated
    as
    the
    average
    of
    duplicate
    samplings.
    13.4
    After
    20
    sample
    analyses,
    or
    batch,
    analyze
    the
    QCS
    solution
    (see
    8.8)
    If
    necessary,
    recalibrate
    using
    a
    single
    mixed
    anion
    standard
    working
    solution
    (see
    8.5),
    and
    replace
    analyte
    migration
    time.
    NOTE
    17—A
    change
    in
    analyte
    migration
    time
    of
    the
    mixed
    anion
    standard
    working
    solution
    by
    more
    than
    +5%
    suggests
    that
    components
    in
    the
    previously
    analyzed
    sample
    matrices
    have
    contaminated
    the
    capillary
    surface.
    Continue
    but
    wash
    the
    capillary
    with
    NaOH
    solution
    (see
    8,12)
    before
    the
    next
    change
    in
    electrolyte.
    14.
    Calculation
    14.1
    Relate
    the
    time
    corrected
    peak
    area
    response
    for
    each
    analyte
    with
    the
    calibration
    curve
    generated
    in
    12.2
    to
    deter
    mine
    mg/L
    concentration
    of
    analyte
    anion.
    If
    the
    sample
    was
    diluted
    prior
    to
    analysis,
    then
    multiply
    mg/L
    anion
    by
    the
    dilution
    factor
    to
    obtain
    the
    original
    sample
    concentration,
    as
    follows:
    Original
    Sample
    mgfL
    Analyte
    =
    (Ax
    SF)
    (1)
    7

    D
    6508
    — 00
    (2005)€1
    where:
    A
    =
    analyte
    concentration
    determined
    from
    the calibration
    curve,
    in mgfL,
    and
    SF
    =
    scale or
    dilution
    factor.
    15.
    Report
    Format
    15.1
    The sample
    analysis
    report
    should
    contain
    the sample
    name,
    analyte
    anion
    name,
    migration
    time
    reported
    to three
    decimal
    places,
    migration
    time
    ratio, peak
    area,
    time
    corrected
    peak
    area, sample
    dilution,
    and original
    solution
    analyte
    concentration.
    15.1.1
    Optional—Report
    analysis
    method
    parameters,
    date
    of sample
    data
    acquisition,
    and
    date of
    result processing
    for
    documentation
    and
    validation
    purposes.
    16.
    Quality
    Control
    16.1 Before
    this
    test method
    is applied
    to the
    analysis
    of
    unknown
    samples,
    the
    analyst
    should establish
    control
    accord
    ing
    to procedures
    recommended
    in Practice
    D
    5847,
    and Guide
    1)5810.
    16.2
    The
    laboratory
    using
    this
    test
    should
    perform
    an initial
    demonstration
    of
    laboratory
    capability
    according
    to
    procedures
    outlines
    in
    Practice D
    5847.
    NOTE
    18—Certified
    performance
    evaluation
    solutions
    (PES)
    and
    QC
    solutions
    (QCS and
    CVS)
    are commercially
    available
    and recommended.
    16.3
    Initial
    Demonstration
    of
    Peiformance—Analyze
    seven
    replicates
    of a
    performance
    evaluation
    solution
    (PES)
    (see
    6.7).
    The
    analyte concentration
    mean
    and
    standard
    deviation
    of
    the
    seven
    replicates
    should
    be calculated
    and
    compared
    to
    the test
    methods
    single
    operator
    precision
    for
    equivalent
    concentra
    tions
    in
    reagent
    water
    given
    in Section
    17.
    16.3.1
    Repeat
    the
    seven
    replicate
    analysis
    protocol
    before
    using
    a freshly
    prepared
    QVS
    solution
    (see
    8.6) and
    QCS
    solution
    (see 8.6)
    for
    the
    first time.
    Calculate
    the
    standard
    deviation
    and compare
    with
    previous
    results
    using
    the
    student
    t-test.
    If no significant
    difference
    is noted,
    then
    use
    the
    combined
    standard
    deviation
    to
    determine
    the
    QC
    limits,
    generally
    the mean
    ± three
    standard
    deviations,
    for
    the
    QCV
    and QCS
    solutions.
    16.4 Calibration
    Verification—After
    calibration,
    verify
    the
    calibration
    linearity
    and acceptable
    instrument
    performance
    using
    a calibration
    verification
    solution
    (see 8.6)
    treated
    as an
    unknown.
    If the determined
    CVS concentrations
    (see 8.6)
    are
    not
    within
    ±
    3 standard
    deviations
    of
    the
    known
    true
    values
    as
    described
    in 16.3.],
    the calibration
    solutions
    may
    be
    out of
    control.
    Reanalyze,
    and if
    analyte
    concentration
    still
    falls
    outside
    the
    acceptable
    limits,
    fresh
    calibration
    solutions
    (see
    8.5)
    are
    required.
    Successful
    CVS analyte
    concentration
    must
    be
    confirmed
    after
    recalibration
    before
    continuing
    with the
    test
    method.
    16.5
    Analyze
    a
    reagent blank
    (see 8.3)
    with
    each
    batch to
    check
    for
    contamination
    introduced
    by the
    laboratory
    or
    use of
    the
    test method.
    16.6 Quality
    Control Solution—Analyze
    one QCS
    (see 8,8)
    after
    20 samples,
    or batch.
    The analyte
    concentrations
    for
    the
    QCS
    should
    fall
    within
    ±
    3 standard
    deviations
    of
    historical
    values
    for the
    equivalent
    concentration
    and
    matrix.
    They are
    determined
    as
    described
    in 1.6.3.1.
    Upper
    Control Limit
    = Analyte
    Mean Value
    + 3 times
    the Standard
    Deviation
    Lower
    Control
    Limit
    = Analyte
    Mean
    Value
    — 3
    tines
    the Standard
    Deviation
    16.7
    Matrix
    Spike
    Recovery—One
    matrix
    spike
    (MS)
    should
    be analyzed
    with
    each
    batch
    of samples
    to
    test
    method
    recovery.
    Spike
    a
    portion
    of one
    sample
    from
    each
    batch
    with
    a
    known
    concentration
    of analyte,
    prepared
    in accordance
    with
    Guide
    I)
    3856. The
    % recovery
    of the
    spike
    should
    fall
    within
    %recovery
    ±
    analyst
    %RSD
    for
    an
    equivalent
    spike
    concen
    tration
    and
    matrix
    given
    in Thbles
    1-7.
    If it
    does
    not,
    an
    interference
    may
    be
    present
    and
    the data
    for the
    set
    of similar
    samples
    matrices
    must
    be qualified
    with a
    warning
    that
    the
    data
    are
    suspect,
    or an
    alternate
    test
    method should
    be used.
    Refer
    to Guide
    1)
    581(1.
    16.7.1
    If the known
    analyte
    concentration
    is
    between
    15
    and
    50 rngJL,
    then spike
    the sample
    solution
    to increase
    analyte
    concentration
    by
    50
    %.
    16.7.2 If
    the known
    analyte
    concentration
    is
    less
    than
    15
    mgfL,
    then
    spike
    the
    sample
    solution
    to
    increase
    analyte
    concentration
    by 100
    %, but not
    less
    than 2
    rngfL.
    16.7.3
    Calculate
    the
    percent
    recovery
    of
    the
    spike
    using
    the
    following
    formula:
    where:
    %
    Recovery
    = 100
    [A
    (V
    +
    V) —
    B VJ/C V
    (2)
    A
    = Analyte
    concentration
    (mg/L)
    in
    spiked
    sample,
    B
    = Analyte
    concentration
    (mgIL)
    in unspiked
    sample,
    C
    = Concentration
    (rng/L) of
    analyte
    in spiking
    solution,
    =
    Volume
    (mL) of
    sample
    used, and
    V = Volume
    (mL)
    added
    with
    spike,
    Evaluate
    the
    performance
    according
    to Practice
    D
    5847.
    16.8
    Method
    Precision—One
    unknown
    sample
    should
    be
    analyzed
    in
    triplicate
    with
    each
    batch
    to test
    method
    precision.
    Calculate
    the
    standard
    deviation
    and
    use the
    F-test
    to
    compare
    with
    the single
    operator
    precision
    give in
    Tables
    1-7
    for
    the
    equivalent
    analyte
    concentration
    and matrix
    type.
    Evaluate
    performance
    according
    to Practice
    D 5847.
    16.9 The
    laboratory
    may
    perform
    additional
    quality
    control
    as
    desired
    or appropriate.
    17. Precision
    and
    Bias
    17.1
    The precirion
    and
    bias
    data
    presented
    in
    this
    test
    method
    meet the
    requirements
    of Practice
    D 2777,
    and
    are
    given in
    Tables
    1-7.
    17.2
    This test
    method
    interlaboratory
    collaborative
    was
    performed
    by 11
    laboratories
    using
    one
    operator
    each.
    Four
    Youden-Pair
    spike
    concentrations
    for
    the
    seven
    analytes
    anions
    yielding
    eight
    analyte concentration
    levels.
    Test
    data
    was
    submitted
    for
    eleven
    reagent
    waters,
    eleven
    substitute
    waste-
    waters,
    15 drinking
    waters,
    and
    13 wastewater
    sample
    matri
    ces.
    17.3
    The
    precision,
    bias, and
    matrix
    recovery
    of this
    test
    method
    per
    anion analyte
    in four
    tested
    sample
    matrices
    are
    based
    upon
    the analyte
    true
    value,
    calculated
    using
    weight,
    volume,
    and
    purity. True
    value
    spiking
    solution
    concentrations
    are
    given in
    Table
    A 1.4.
    17.4
    The bias
    and
    matrix
    recovery
    statements
    for
    less
    than
    2
    mgIL
    of chloride,
    sulfate,
    and nitrate
    in
    naturally
    occurring
    sample
    matrices
    may
    be
    misleading
    due
    to
    spiking
    of
    small
    analyte
    concentration
    into
    a high naturally
    occurring
    analyte

    D 6508
    — 00
    (2005)d1
    TABLE
    1
    Precision,
    Bias,
    and
    Matrix
    Recovery
    for
    Chloride
    Matrx
    No.
    of
    True
    Val e
    Mean
    Bias
    Versus
    Recovery Versus
    Interlab
    Interlab
    Single
    Operator
    Analyst
    Values
    U
    Result
    True Value
    True
    Value
    Std
    0ev S(t)
    %RSD
    Std
    0ev.
    S(o)
    %RSD
    Reagent
    water
    9
    0.50
    0.55
    0.05
    110.0
    0.11
    19.8
    10
    0.71
    0.69
    —0.02
    97.2
    0.08
    11.5
    0.05
    7.5
    10
    2.00
    1.97
    —0.03
    98.5
    0.14
    6.8
    9
    2.98
    2.97
    —0.01
    99.7
    0.11
    3.8
    0.05
    2.1
    10
    14.92
    14.76
    —0.16
    98.9
    0.61
    4.2
    10
    19.91
    19.81
    —0.10
    99.5
    0.81
    4.1
    0.48
    2.8
    10
    39.81
    38.58
    —1.23
    96.9
    1.43
    -
    3.7
    10
    49.76
    48.70
    —1.06
    97.9
    1.94
    4.0
    1.36
    3.1
    Substitute
    wastewater
    9
    0.50
    0.46
    —0.04
    92.0
    0.51
    111.1
    9
    0.71
    0.43
    —0.28
    60.6
    0.69
    160.7
    0.42
    93.8
    9
    2.00
    1.52
    —0.48
    76.0
    0.68
    45.0
    9
    2.98
    2.58
    —0.40
    86.6
    0.63
    24.5
    0.50
    24.3
    9
    14.92
    14.29
    —0.63
    95.8
    1.02
    7.1
    9
    19.91
    18.93
    —0.98
    95.1
    1.24
    6.6
    0.60
    3.6
    9
    39.81
    37.34
    —2.47
    93.8
    5.44
    14.6
    9
    49.76
    47.54
    —2.22
    95.5
    3.13
    6.6
    4.43
    10.4
    Drinking water
    12
    0.50
    0.63
    0.13
    126.0
    0.67
    106.1
    12
    0.71
    0.75
    0.04
    105.6
    0.34
    45.5
    0.40
    57.2
    12
    2.00
    2.15
    0.15
    107.5
    0.51
    23.6
    12
    2.98
    2.95
    —0.03
    99.0
    0.39
    13.1
    0.47
    16.5
    12
    14.92
    14.54
    —0.38
    97.5
    0.71
    4.9
    12
    19.91
    19.09
    —0.82
    95.9
    1.11
    5.8
    0.37
    2.2
    12
    39.81
    38.38
    —1.43
    96.4
    1.56
    4.1
    12
    49.76
    47.97
    —1.79
    96.4
    2.19
    4.6
    1.26
    3.9
    “Real”
    Wastewater
    9
    0.50
    0.42
    —0.08
    84.0
    0.34
    81.0
    10
    0.71
    0.47
    —0.24
    66.2
    0.34
    72.6
    0.26
    59.3
    10
    2.00
    1.56
    —0.44
    78.0
    0.51
    32.7
    9
    2.98
    2.78
    —0.20
    93.3
    0.19
    6.8
    0.37
    17.3
    10
    14.92
    14.29
    —0.63
    95.8
    0.63
    4.4
    10
    19.91
    18.83
    —1.08
    94.6
    0.78
    4.1
    0.46
    2.8
    9
    39.81
    37.01
    —2.80
    93.0
    2.78
    -
    7.5
    10
    49.76
    48.24
    —1.52
    96.9
    3.15
    6.5
    2.54
    6.0
    concentration
    observed
    with
    the matrix
    blank.
    The commonly
    with
    Millennium
    Data
    Processing
    Software,
    and one
    laboratory
    occurring
    analyte
    concentrations
    observed
    in
    the sample
    matrix
    used
    a Agilent
    CE
    System with
    Diode
    Array
    Detector
    that
    blanks
    for
    the
    naturally
    occurring
    tested
    matrices
    are
    given
    in
    provided
    equivalent
    results.
    Table
    Al.5.
    17.5
    The
    high nitrate
    bias
    and
    %recovery
    noted
    for
    the
    0.5
    NOTE 19—Refer
    to
    reference
    B 1.16
    and Agilent
    (the
    former
    HP
    mg/L
    NO
    3
    spike solution
    are attributed
    to
    the spiking
    solution
    company)
    website
    for
    recommended
    operating
    conditions.
    containing
    50 mgfL
    nitrite
    and 0.5
    mgIL nitrate.
    Refer
    to Annex
    Table
    Al.4,
    Solution
    3.
    Some of
    the nitrite
    converted
    to nitrate
    18.
    Keywords
    prior
    to analysis.
    Similar
    NO,,
    conversion
    effect
    is observed
    18.1
    anion;
    capillary
    electrophoresis;
    drinking
    water;
    ion
    with
    the 2-mgfL
    nitrate
    and 2 mgIL
    nitrite
    spike,
    Solution
    7.
    analysis;
    reagent
    water;
    substitute
    wastewater;
    wastewater
    17.6 All
    collaborative
    participants
    used
    the premade
    chro
    mate
    electrolyte.
    7
    Ten
    laboratories
    used a
    Waters CIA
    Analyzer
    9

    cfr
    D
    6508
    00
    (2005)E1
    TABLE
    2 Precision,
    Bias, and
    Matrix
    Recovery
    for
    Bromide
    No. of
    Mean
    Values
    True Value
    Result
    10
    0.51
    0.60
    10
    0.70
    0.83
    10
    2.00
    2.06
    10
    3.01
    2.88
    10
    14.93
    15.00
    10
    19.91
    19.32
    10
    39.81
    39.66
    10
    49.77
    50.04
    Sias
    Versus
    Recovery
    Versus
    Interlab
    True
    Value
    True
    Value
    Std
    Dev
    S(t)
    0.09
    117.6
    0.19
    0.13
    118.6
    0.23
    0.06
    103.0
    0.14
    —0.13
    95.7
    0.23
    0.07
    100.5
    0.58
    —0.59
    97.0
    0.97
    —0.15
    99.6
    1.24
    0.27
    100.5
    2.94
    Interlab
    %RSD
    31.0
    28.2
    6.6
    7.9
    3.9
    5.0
    3.1
    5.9
    0.08
    9.3
    0.17
    7.0
    1.63
    9.7
    0.48
    1.1
    Matrix
    Single
    Operator
    Analyst
    Std
    Dev.
    S(o)
    %RSD
    Reagent
    water
    Substitute
    wastewater
    Drinking
    water
    “Real”
    Wastewater
    0.10
    0.15
    0.75
    1.61
    14.6
    6.3
    4.4
    3.6
    0.19
    28.8
    0.21
    21.8
    0.22
    10.2
    0.35
    12.8
    0.58
    3.9
    2.62
    13.8
    1.11
    2.9
    1.52
    3.1
    9
    0.51
    0.67
    9
    0.70
    0.96
    9
    2.00
    2.14
    9
    3.01
    2.72
    9
    14.93
    14.70
    9
    19.91
    18.91
    9
    39.81
    38.76
    9
    49.77
    48.81
    13
    0.51
    0.58
    13
    0.70
    0.83
    13
    2.00
    1.98
    13
    3.01
    2.56
    13
    14.93
    14.63
    13
    19.91
    19.22
    13
    39.81
    38.97
    13
    49.77
    48.74
    11
    0.51
    0.59
    12
    0.70
    0.78
    11
    2.00
    2.08
    12
    3.01
    2.70
    12
    14.93
    15.16
    11
    19.91
    19.46
    12
    39.81
    40.24
    12
    49.77
    49.97
    0.16
    0.26
    0.14
    —0.29
    —0.23
    —1.00
    —1.05
    —0.96
    0.07
    0.13
    —0.02
    —0.45
    —0.30
    —0.69
    —0.84
    —1.03
    0.08
    0.08
    0.08
    —0.31
    0.23
    —0.45
    0.43
    0.20
    131.4
    137.1
    107.0
    90.4
    98.5
    95.0
    97.4
    98.1
    113.7
    118.6
    99.0
    85.0
    98.0
    96.5
    97.9
    97.9
    115.7
    111.4
    104.0
    89.7
    101.5
    97.7
    101.1
    100.4
    0.14
    19.9
    0.15
    6.8
    0.77
    4.6
    1.13
    2.6
    0.25
    0.22
    0.25
    0.25
    0.50
    1.10
    1.99
    1.49
    0.11
    0.19
    0.13
    0.41
    0.90
    1.63
    2.27
    2.52
    43.4
    26.5
    12.5
    9.7
    3.4
    5.7
    5.1
    3.1
    19.3
    24.4
    6.3
    15.1
    6.0
    8.4
    5.7
    5.0
    0.10
    0.27
    1.09
    0.91
    14.0
    11.5
    6.3
    2.0
    10

    D
    6508
    00
    (2005)d1
    TABLE
    3
    Precision,
    Bias,
    and
    Matrix
    Recovery
    for Nitrite
    M
    .
    No.
    of
    T
    I
    a
    rix
    Mean
    Bias
    Versus
    Recovery
    Versus
    Interlab
    Interlab
    Single
    Operator
    Analyst
    Values
    ru
    a ue
    Result
    True Value
    True Value
    Std
    0ev S(t)
    %RSD
    Std 0ev.
    S(o)
    %RSD
    Reagent
    water
    9
    0.50
    0.62
    0.12
    124.0
    0.16
    26.1
    9
    0.70
    0.72
    0.02
    102.9
    0.08
    10.5
    0.05
    7.1
    10
    2.00
    1.31
    —0.69
    65.5
    025
    19.2
    10
    2.98
    3.11
    0.13
    104.4
    0.17
    5.4
    0.13
    6.0
    10
    14.86
    14.70
    —0.16
    98.9
    0.47
    3.2
    10
    19.81
    19.88
    0.07
    100.4
    0.70
    3.5
    0.27
    1.5
    10
    39.61
    39.90
    0.29
    100.7
    0.88
    2.2
    10
    49.52
    48.24
    —1.28
    97.4
    1.34
    2.8
    1.25
    2.8
    Substitute
    wastewater
    9
    0.50
    0.37
    —0.13
    74.0
    0.22
    59.7
    9
    0.70
    0.59
    —0.11
    84.3
    0.28
    48.1
    0.21
    43.2
    10
    2.00
    1.25
    —0.75
    62.5
    0.38
    30.8
    9
    2.98
    2.62
    —0.36
    87.9
    0.82
    31.4
    0.43
    22.1
    9
    14.86
    14.40
    —0.46
    96.9
    0.58
    4.0
    10
    19.81
    19.50
    —0.31
    98.4
    1.66
    8.5
    0.81
    4.8
    10
    39.61
    39.97
    0.36
    100.9
    2.02
    5.0
    9
    49.52
    49.09
    —0.43
    99.1
    3.03
    6.2
    2.11
    4.7
    Drinking
    water
    11
    0.50
    0.52
    0.02
    104.0
    0.08
    14.4
    12
    0.70
    0.74
    0.04
    105.7
    0.17
    23.3
    0.09
    13.5
    12
    2.00
    1.30
    —0.70
    65.0
    0.21
    15.9
    12
    2.98
    2.97
    —0.01
    99.7
    0.14
    4.6
    0.16
    7.4
    11
    14.86
    14.60
    —0.26
    98.3
    0.40
    2.8
    11
    -
    19.81
    19.82
    0.01
    100.1
    0.59
    3.0
    0.26
    1.5
    11
    39.61
    39.35
    —0.26
    99.3
    0.99
    2.5
    12
    49.52
    49.14
    —0.38
    99.2
    1.93
    3.9
    0.64
    1.5
    “Real’
    Wastewater
    9
    0.50
    0.55
    0.05
    110.0
    0.13
    24.5
    10
    0.70
    0.73
    0.03
    104.3
    0.24
    32.9
    0.07
    10.8
    9
    2.00
    1.27
    —0.73
    63.5
    0.18
    14.2
    10
    2.98
    2.99
    0.01
    100.3
    0.19
    6.2
    0.15
    7.0
    10
    14.86
    14.55
    —0.31
    97.9
    0.46
    3.1
    10
    19.81
    19.68
    —0.13
    99.3
    0.71
    3.6
    0.38
    2.2
    9
    39.61
    39.21
    —0.40
    99.0
    1.03
    2.6
    9
    49.52
    47.27
    —2.25
    95.5
    3.50
    7.4
    2.40
    5.6
    ii

    cflJjj
    D
    6508
    — 00
    (2005)€1
    TABLE
    4
    Precision,
    Bias,
    and Matrix
    Recovery
    for
    Sulfate
    No. of
    Mean
    Values
    True
    Value
    Result
    9
    0.49
    0.49
    10
    0.70
    0.71
    10
    1.98
    2.04
    10
    2.98
    3.09
    10
    14.86
    14.67
    10
    19.81
    19.67
    10
    39.60
    39.66
    10
    49.51
    49.27
    Bias
    Versus
    Recovery
    Versus
    Interlab
    True Value
    True
    Value
    Std Dev
    S(t)
    0.00
    100.0
    0.18
    0.01
    101.4
    0.20
    0.06
    103.0
    0.19
    0.11
    103.7
    0.24
    —0.19
    98.7
    0.57
    —0.14
    99.3
    0.73
    0.06
    100.2
    0.92
    —0.24
    99.5
    1.26
    Interlab
    %RSD
    37.5
    29.2
    9.7
    7-9
    4.0
    3.8
    2.4
    2.6
    10
    0.49
    0.37
    11
    0.70
    0.16
    11
    1.98
    1.57
    11
    2.98
    2.53
    11
    14.86
    14.69
    10
    19.81
    19.38
    11
    39.60
    38.74
    10
    49.51
    48.36
    —0.12
    —0.54
    —0.41
    —0.45
    —0.17
    —0.43
    —0.86
    —1.15
    Matrix
    Reagent
    water
    Single Operator
    Analyst
    Ski
    Dev.
    S(o)
    %RSD
    0.05
    0.06
    0.44
    0.49
    8.3
    2.5
    2.6
    1.1
    Substitute
    wastewater
    9
    0.49
    0.38
    —0.11
    77.6
    0.25
    66.9
    9
    0.70
    0.51
    —0.19
    72.9
    0.08
    16.4
    9
    1.98
    1.83
    —0.15
    92.4
    0.29
    16.2
    9
    2.98
    2.86
    —0.12
    96.0
    0.31
    11.2
    9
    14.86
    14.19
    —0.67
    95.5
    1.06
    7.7
    9
    19.81
    19.23
    —0.58
    97.1
    0.97
    5.2
    S
    39.60
    38.45
    —1.15
    97.1
    1.33
    3.6
    9
    49.51
    47.75
    —1.76
    96.4
    1.43
    3.1
    Drinking
    water
    12
    0.49
    0.41
    —0.08
    83.7
    0.21
    52.8
    12
    0.70
    0.41
    —0.29
    58.6
    0.20
    50.3
    13
    1.98
    1.77
    —0.21
    89.4
    0.53
    30.3
    13
    2.98
    2.68
    —0.30
    89.9
    0.42
    16.2
    13
    14.86
    14.25
    —0.61
    95.9
    1.11
    8.0
    12
    19.81
    19.31
    —0.50
    97.5
    1.39
    7.4
    12
    39.60
    38.58
    —1.02
    97.4
    1.96
    5.2
    13
    49.51
    48.43
    —1.08
    97.8
    2.04
    4.3
    “Real” Wastewater
    0.18
    39.3
    0.20
    8.6
    0.46
    2.8
    0.75
    1.8
    0.14
    34.3
    0.27
    12.1
    1.48
    8.9
    1.44
    3.3
    0.47
    179.6
    0.24
    11.9
    0.57
    3.4
    0.47
    1.1
    75.5
    0.39
    106.4
    22.9
    1.19
    765.2
    79.3
    0.87
    55.4
    84.9
    0.64
    25.4
    98.9
    1.26
    8.6
    97.8
    0.90
    4.6
    97.8
    1.71
    4.4
    97.7
    1.51
    3.1
    12

    D
    6508
    — 00
    (2005)’
    TABLE
    5
    Precision,
    Bias,
    and Matrix
    Recovery
    for
    Nitrate
    M
    t.
    No. of
    True Value
    a rix
    Mean
    Bias
    Versus
    Recovery
    Versus
    Interlab
    Interlab
    Single
    Operator
    Analyst
    Values
    Result
    True
    Value
    True
    Value
    Std
    Dev S(t)
    %RSD
    Std
    Dev.
    S(o)
    %RSD
    Reagent
    water
    10
    0.50
    1.02
    0.52
    204.00
    0.08
    7.4
    10
    0.69
    0.71
    0.02
    102.90
    0.08
    11.6
    0.06
    6.4
    11
    1.99
    2.83
    0.84
    142.21
    0.23
    8.1
    11
    2.97
    2.89
    —0.08
    97.31
    0.18
    6.4
    0.14
    5.0
    11
    14.91
    14.77
    —0.14
    99.06
    0.44
    3.0
    11
    19.18
    19.77
    0.59
    103.08
    0.64
    3.2
    0.24
    1.4
    10
    39.86
    39.09
    —0.77
    98.07
    1.43
    3.7
    10
    49.77
    48.93
    —0.84
    98.31
    1.72
    3.5
    0.62
    1.4
    Substitute
    wastewater
    11
    0.50
    1.18
    0.68
    236.00
    0.41
    34.9
    10
    0.69
    0.55
    —0.14
    79.71
    0.30
    55.3
    0.42
    4.9
    10
    1.99
    2.70
    0.71
    135.68
    0.42
    15.4
    10
    2.97
    2.33
    —0.64
    78.45
    1.10
    47.3
    0.39
    15.4
    9
    14.91
    14.29
    —0.62
    95.84
    0.78
    5.4
    10
    19.18
    18.69
    —0.49
    97.45
    1.46
    7.8
    0.25
    1.5
    11
    39.86
    37.70
    —2.16
    94.58
    1.93
    5.1
    11
    49.77
    47.78
    —1.99
    96.00
    2.18
    4.6
    1.62
    3.8
    Drinking
    water
    11
    0.50
    1.06
    0.56
    212.00
    0.19
    18.1
    11
    0.69
    0.65
    —0.04
    94.20
    006
    8.7
    0.12
    14.4
    12
    1.99
    3.05
    1.06
    153.27
    0.39
    12.8
    11
    2.97
    3.01
    0.04
    101.35
    0.22
    7.2
    0.33
    10.8
    12
    14.91
    14.69
    —0.22
    98.52
    0.62
    4.2
    12
    19.18
    20.05
    0.87
    104.54
    0.88
    4.4
    0.46
    2.7
    12
    39.86
    39.31
    —0.55
    98.62
    1.67
    4.3
    12
    49.77
    48.93
    —0.84
    98.31
    143
    2.9
    0.78
    1.8
    “Real’
    Wastewater
    11
    0.50
    0.94
    0.44
    188.00
    0.80
    84.7
    10
    0.69
    0.69
    0.00
    100.00
    0.09
    13.3
    0.39
    47.6
    10
    1.99
    3.00
    1.01
    150.75
    0.38
    12.7
    10
    2.97
    3.01
    0.04
    101.35
    0.20
    6.6
    0.23
    7.8
    11
    14.91
    14.52
    —0.39
    97.38
    0.66
    4.6
    11
    19.18
    19.26
    0.08
    100.42
    0.77
    4.0
    0.77
    4.6
    11
    39.86
    39.13
    —0.73
    98.17
    1.78
    4.6
    11
    49.77
    49.17
    —0.60
    98.79
    2.26
    4.6
    0.93
    2.1
    13

    D
    6508
    — 00
    (2005)€1
    TABLE
    6 Precision,
    Bias,
    and
    Matrix Recovery
    for
    Fluoride
    M
    t.
    No. of
    True
    Val
    5 rix
    Mean
    Bias Versus
    Recovery
    Versus
    Interlab
    Interlab
    Single
    Operator
    Analyst
    Values
    ue
    Result
    True
    Value
    True Value
    Std
    Dev S(t)
    %RSD
    Std
    Dev.
    S(o)
    %RSD
    Reagent
    water
    10
    0.50
    0.51
    0.01
    102.00
    11.00
    11.4
    10
    0.71
    0.73
    0.02
    102.82
    7.90
    8.1
    0.02
    2.9
    10
    2.00
    2.05
    0.05
    102.50
    3.60
    3.7
    10
    3.00
    2.96
    —0.04
    98.67
    4.40
    4.6
    0.09
    3.4
    10
    6.99
    7.02
    0.03
    100.43
    5.40
    5.6
    10
    9.99
    9.79
    —0.20
    98.00
    4.60
    4.8
    0.13
    1.6
    10
    19.98
    19.60
    —0.38
    98.10
    3.80
    3.9
    10
    24.99
    24.51
    —0.48
    98.08
    4.80
    4.9
    0.74
    34
    Substitute
    wastewater
    10
    0.50
    0.50
    0.00
    100.00
    0.09
    18.0
    10
    0.71
    0.71
    0.00
    100.00
    0.09
    12.0
    0.01
    2.3
    10
    2.00
    1.98
    —0.02
    99.00
    0.12
    6.0
    10
    3.00
    2.94
    —0.06
    98.00
    0.10
    3.4
    0.06
    2.6
    10
    6.99
    6.92
    —0.07
    99.00
    0.28
    4.1
    9
    9.99
    9.94
    —0.05
    99.50
    0.46
    4.7
    0.28
    3.3
    10
    19.98
    19.67
    —0.31
    98.45
    0.94
    4.8
    10
    24.99
    24.78
    —0.21
    99.16
    1.09
    4.4
    0.63
    2.8
    Drinking
    water
    13
    0.50
    0.48
    —0.02
    96.00
    0.06
    12.9
    13
    0.71
    0.68
    —0.03
    95.77
    0.06
    9.5
    0.02
    3.4
    13
    2.00
    1.96
    —0.04
    98.00
    0.08
    3.9
    13
    3.00
    2.90
    —0.10
    96.67
    0.10
    3.4
    0.08
    3.5
    13
    6.99
    6.91
    —0.08
    98.86
    0.25
    3.6
    13
    9.99
    9.91
    —0.08
    99.20
    0.37
    3.7
    0.18
    2.2
    13
    19.98
    19.94
    —0.04
    99.80
    0.68
    3.4
    12
    24.99
    24.27
    —0.72
    97.12
    1.63
    6.7
    1.30
    5.9
    “Real” Wastewater
    11
    0.50
    0.47
    —0.03
    94.00
    0.08
    16.9
    11
    0.71
    0.68
    —0.03
    95.77
    0.08
    11.7
    0.04
    7.6
    11
    2.00
    1.96
    —0.04
    98.00
    0.12
    6.3
    11
    3.00
    2.93
    —0.07
    97.67
    0.18
    6.2
    0.09
    3.5
    11
    6.99
    6.85
    —0.14
    98.00
    0.26
    3.8
    10
    9.99
    9.56
    —0.43
    95.70
    0.73
    7.7
    0.44
    5.3
    11
    19.98
    20.06
    0.08
    100.40
    1.23
    6.1
    11
    24.99
    25.12
    0.13
    100.52
    1.34
    5.3
    -
    0.32
    1.4
    14

    D 6508
    — 00
    (2005)d1
    TABLE
    7 Precision,
    Bias,
    and Matrix
    Recovery
    for
    0-Phosphate
    M tr
    No.
    of
    T
    Value
    S
    IX
    Mean
    Bias
    Versus
    Recovery Versus
    Interlab
    Interlab
    Single
    Operator
    Analyst
    Values
    rue
    Result
    True
    Value
    True
    Value
    Std Dev S(t)
    %RSD
    Std Dev.
    S(o)
    %RSD
    Reagent
    water
    10
    0.50
    0.41
    —0.09
    82.00
    0.12
    29.6
    9
    0.69
    0.51
    —0.18
    73.91
    0.13
    26.6
    0.03
    7.2
    10
    1.99
    1.88
    —0.11
    94.47
    0.16
    8.3
    10
    2.98
    2.76
    —0.22
    92.62
    0.14
    4.9
    0.08
    3.2
    10
    14.86
    14.93
    0.07
    100.47
    0.64
    4.3
    9
    19.80
    19.76
    —0.04
    99.80
    1.00
    5.1
    0.85
    4.9
    10
    39.60
    39.79
    0.19
    100.48
    1.38
    3.5
    10
    49.51
    50.10
    0.59
    101.19
    1.76
    3.5
    0.72
    1.6
    Substitute wastewater
    11
    0.50
    0.49
    —0.01
    98.00
    0.15
    30.0
    10
    0.69
    0.59
    —0.10
    85.51
    0.17
    28.8
    0.13
    24.4
    11
    1.99
    1.92
    —0.07
    96.48
    0.28
    14.6
    10
    2.98
    2.89
    -0.09
    96.98
    0.22
    7.6
    0.18
    7.5
    11
    14.86
    15.31
    0.45
    103.03
    1.74
    11.4
    11
    19.80
    19.78
    —0.02
    99.90
    1.16
    5.9
    0.84
    4.8
    11
    39.60
    39.58
    —0.02
    99.95
    2.72
    6.9
    11
    49.51
    49.19
    —0.32
    99.35
    3.98
    8.1
    2.18
    4.9
    Drinking water
    12
    0.50
    0.46
    —0.04
    92.00
    0.14
    30.0
    13
    0.69
    0.55
    —0.14
    79.71
    0.20
    36.3
    0.07
    13.4
    13
    1.99
    1.89
    —0.10
    94.97
    0.22
    11.9
    13
    2.98
    2.87
    —0.11
    96.31
    0.24
    8.5
    0.07
    2.8
    12
    14.86
    15.09
    0.23
    101.55
    0.91
    6.1
    13
    19.80
    20.28
    0.48
    102.42
    0.96
    4.7
    1.06
    6.0
    13
    39.60
    40.37
    0.77
    101.94
    2.15
    5.3
    13
    49.51
    50.75
    1.24
    102.50
    3.14
    6.2
    1.03
    2.3
    “Real”
    Wastewater
    11
    0.50
    0.43
    —0.07
    86.00
    0.17
    39.1
    11
    0.69
    0.53
    —0.16
    76.81
    0.24
    46.5
    0.12
    25.8
    11
    1.99
    1.72
    —0.27
    86.43
    0.27
    15.8
    11
    2.98
    2.52
    —0.46
    84.56
    0.48
    19.2
    0.30
    14.0
    11
    14.86
    14.93
    0.07
    100.47
    0.91
    6.1
    11
    19.80
    19.90
    0.10
    100.51
    1.35
    6.8
    0.91
    5.2
    11
    39.60
    38.98
    —0.62
    98.43
    1.45
    3.7
    10
    49.51
    48.26
    —1.25
    97.48
    1.80
    3.7
    0.82
    1.9
    ANNEX
    (Mandatory
    Information)
    Al.
    Data
    Al.i All
    data presented
    in
    the
    following tables
    conform
    and
    exceed the
    requirements
    of
    Practice
    D 2777—98.
    Data
    from
    eleven
    reagent waters,
    eleven
    substitute
    wastewater,
    15 drink
    ing
    water, and
    thirteen
    wastewater
    sample
    matrices,
    were
    tested using
    a set of
    four Youden-Pair
    concentrations
    for seven
    analyte
    anions. All
    submitted
    individual data
    points
    are the
    average of duplicate
    samplings.
    A1.2 Calibration
    Linearity
    Al
    .2.1
    All laboratories
    used a provided
    set of four
    certified,
    mixed anion
    calibration
    solutions
    in
    concentrations
    between
    0.5 mgIL
    and 50
    mgIL,
    formulated in
    random concentrations
    given
    in
    Table Al .1.
    They were
    prepared from
    certified,
    individual
    1000
    mg/L stock
    standards.
    8
    No
    dilution was
    necessary.
    8
    Obtained
    from
    APG Inc., Beipre,
    OH.
    Analyte Anion
    Chloride
    50
    25
    0.5
    10
    Bromide
    0.5
    25
    10
    50
    Nitrite
    25
    0.5
    50
    10
    Sulfate
    10
    25
    0.5
    50
    Nitrate
    25
    0.5
    50
    10
    Fluoride
    5
    0.5
    10
    25
    Phosphate
    50
    25
    0.5
    10
    Al .2.2 A linear
    through
    zero regression
    was
    used
    to calcu
    late
    the
    calibration
    curve.
    The
    range
    coefficient
    of
    determina
    tion
    (r
    2
    )
    values obtained
    from the
    collaborative
    is
    shown
    in
    Table
    Al .2.
    AL3
    Quality
    Control
    Solution
    Preparation
    Al .3.1
    The quality
    control
    solution
    (QCS) also
    was
    used
    as
    the calibration
    verification
    solution
    (CVS).
    TABLE
    A1.1
    Collaborative
    Calibration
    Standard,
    mgIL
    Concentrations
    Standard
    1
    Standard 2
    Standard
    3
    Standard
    4
    15

    4Jfr
    D
    6508 — 00
    (2005)d1
    TABLE
    Al .2 Expected Range
    of
    (j2)
    Coefficient
    of
    Determination
    Anion
    /
    2
    Average, n=29
    Lowest
    Highest
    Chloride
    099987
    0.99959
    0.99997
    Bromide
    0.99953
    0.99878
    0.99996
    Nitrite
    0.99983
    0.99961
    0.99999
    Sulfate
    0.99976
    0.99901
    0.99999
    Nitrate
    0.99957
    0.99840
    0.99999
    Fluoride
    0.99972
    0.99797
    0.99999
    Phosphate
    0.99982
    0.99942
    0.99999
    Al .3.2
    The
    quality control
    solution
    (QCS) was manufac
    tured and
    certified
    8
    as
    100X
    concentrate, to replicate
    typical
    drinking
    water
    concentrations,
    and required 1:100
    dilution
    with
    water before
    analysis.
    The QCS analyte
    concentrations,
    re
    quired control
    limits,
    and
    interlaboratoty determined
    control
    limits
    based
    upon 82
    analyses
    are given in Thhie Al
    .3.
    A1.4 Youden Pair
    Spiking Solution
    Preparation
    Al .4.1
    Eight
    mixed anion,
    I
    OOX
    concentrate,
    spiking solu
    tions were
    prepared in
    accordance with the Reagents
    and
    Materials
    of the test method using anhydrous
    sodium
    salts. The
    mg/L
    concentrations
    of the eight
    standards followed
    the
    approved
    Youden Pair design:
    0.5 and 0.7, 2 and
    3, 15 and 20,
    40 and
    50
    mgfL for all anions except
    fluoride, which
    is
    0.5 and
    0.7,
    2 and
    3, 7 and 10,
    20
    and 25 mgfL. The analyte
    true value
    concentrations
    were randomized
    among the
    eight spiking
    solutions
    as described in
    Table Al .4.
    Al .4.2 A ninth solution
    containing
    approximately
    10
    mgfL
    of each analyte was used
    for method
    detection
    limit
    calcula
    tions.
    Al .4.2.1 These solutions,
    kept at ambient
    temperature,
    were
    analyzed before and
    during
    the collaborative
    to monitor
    for
    accuracy and
    stability.
    The mgfL true value
    in
    was
    used
    to
    determine
    bias,
    matrix recovery, and the
    single
    operator
    and
    interlaboratory
    precision
    in the P and B
    tables
    in accordance
    with Practice
    D 2777.
    Al .4.2.2 Solution
    3 and 7 exhibited
    some conversion
    of
    nitrite to nitrate
    before analysis. This conversion
    is evident
    in
    the bias and %
    recovery for 0.5 rng/L and
    2
    mgJL nitrite
    and
    nitrate.
    A1.5
    Sample Matrix
    Preparation
    Al .5.1 All
    participating laboratories
    provided
    and
    tested
    reagent water,
    substitute wastewater naturally
    occurring
    drink
    ing water, and
    naturally occurring wastewater.
    Before
    matrix
    spiking with
    the
    Youden Pair solutions,
    the sample matrix
    was
    evaluated,
    then
    appropriately
    diluted
    to give the highest
    anion
    TABLE
    Al.3 Quality Control Acceptance
    Limits
    True Value, Certified Value,
    Required 99
    %
    Determined
    QCS
    Analyte Anion
    Confidence
    Mean
    ±
    Std
    mgIL
    mg/L
    Interval
    Dev,
    n = 82
    Chloride
    48.68
    48.61
    ± 0.12
    43.99—52.96
    47.64
    ±
    1.53
    Bromide
    0.00
    0.00
    0.00
    0.00
    Nitrite
    2.87
    2.90
    ±
    0.07
    2.39—3.26
    2.88 ± 0.19
    Sulfate
    35.69
    35.63
    ± 0.25
    29.54—40.53
    35.02 ±
    1.21
    Nitrate
    15.76
    15.78
    ±
    0.15
    12.80—18.39
    15.33
    ±
    4.35
    Fluoride
    1.69
    1.68
    ±
    0.01
    1.49—1.87
    1.67
    ±
    0.09
    Phosphate
    5.47
    5.55
    ± 0.12
    4.78—6.20
    5.58 ±
    0.28
    TABLE
    A1.4 True
    Value Youden Pair
    Spiking
    mgIL
    Concentrations
    Anion/TV
    1
    2
    3
    4
    56
    789
    Chloride
    0.71
    2.00
    2.98
    14.92
    39.81
    19.91
    49.76
    0.50
    10.20
    Bromide
    2.00
    3.01 14.93 39.81
    19.91 49.77
    0.70
    0.51
    10.49
    Nitrite
    2.98 39.61
    19.81 14.86 49.52
    0.50
    2.00
    0.70
    9.94
    Sulfate
    39.60
    49.51
    0.49
    0.70
    1.98 2.98
    14.86
    19.81
    10.23
    Nitrate
    14.92
    19.19
    39.87 49.78
    0.50
    0.70
    2.00
    2.98
    10.35
    Fluoride
    2.00
    0.71
    0.50
    3.00
    9.99
    6.99
    19.98
    24.99
    10.40
    Phosphate
    49.51
    39.60 19.90
    0.50
    2.98
    1.99
    0.69
    14.86
    10.48
    concentration
    below 50 mg/L.
    The diluted
    sample
    matrix
    was
    used
    to dilute each
    Youden Pair
    spiking solution
    1:100.
    Al .5.2 Reagent
    water
    was used
    as-is.
    Substitute
    wastewater
    was
    diluted 1:20
    with water. Naturally
    occurring
    drinking
    water
    was used
    as-is or diluted
    1:5 with
    water.
    Naturally
    occurring
    wastewater
    was diluted between
    1:3
    and
    1:20,
    except
    one
    which
    required
    a
    1:1000 dilution
    due to high
    chloride.
    Al
    .5.3
    Due
    to
    the anion
    content
    of the
    naturally
    occurring
    drinking
    water
    and
    “real”
    wastewater
    matrices,
    some
    of the
    reported
    spike matrix
    results exceeded
    the scope
    of this
    test
    method. Linearity
    and
    matrix recovery data
    obtained
    from
    the
    collaborative
    indicated
    that
    these data
    are
    acceptable,
    and
    extended
    the useful range
    of this test method.
    Al .5.4 Due
    to the anion
    content of the
    naturally
    occurring
    sample
    matrices
    given
    in Table A 1.5,
    the low
    concentration
    bias and
    recovery may
    be misleading
    because
    of spiking
    a low
    anion
    concentration
    increment into
    a large naturally
    occurring
    concentration
    of
    the
    same anion.
    A1.6
    Test Method
    Detection Limits
    Al .6.1 Spiking
    Solution No.
    9,
    containing
    10
    mg/L
    of
    each
    analyte,
    was diluted
    1:50
    with water
    and
    was used
    for
    detection
    limit
    calculations.
    Seven
    replicate
    samplings
    were
    run,
    and the
    mean
    and
    standard
    deviation
    were
    calculated.
    The
    mean
    time
    corrected
    peak
    area
    response
    was
    given the
    true
    value
    of the
    solution
    No.
    9, and
    from
    a simple
    proportion,
    the
    standard
    deviation
    was
    calculated
    as mg/L.
    Std Dev, mgIL =
    (True Value Conc
    Sol’n No.
    9,
    mg/L)
    (Response
    Std Dev)
    Ave Response
    of Sol’n No.
    9
    (All)
    Al .6.2 Method
    detection limits
    were derived
    using
    EPA
    protocol
    and the
    student t-test at
    6 df, as
    follows:
    The
    method detection
    limit
    (MDL)
    (3.14)(Std
    Dev,
    mg/L)
    (Al.2)
    Al.6.3
    The upper
    and lower confidence
    limits
    were
    calcu
    lated
    as;
    95
    %
    Confidence
    Interval:
    LCL
    (Lower Confidence
    Limit)
    - 0.64
    x
    MDL
    UCL (Upper
    Confidence
    Limit)
    = 2.20 x
    MDL
    Al.6.4 Method
    detection limits
    are given
    in Table
    A1.6.
    TABLE
    Al
    .5 Blank Analyte
    Concentrations
    for
    Naturally
    Occurring
    Sample
    Matrices
    Sulfate
    0.5
    to 33.6
    3.2 to 4.0
    0.5 to
    50.4
    Data
    in mg/L
    Chloride
    Nitrate
    Drinking water
    0.7 to 41.9
    0.2 to
    6.5
    Substitute
    wastewater
    20.5 to 25.5
    Not
    Detected
    “Real” wastewater
    0.9 to
    43.4
    0.3
    to 23.0
    16

    D
    6508 —
    00 (2005)
    TABLE
    Al
    .6 Method
    Detection
    Limits
    (Nonmandatory
    Information)
    Xl.
    SUGGESTED
    BACKGROUND
    REFERENCES
    EPA Method
    6500,
    “Dissolved
    Inorganic
    Anions
    in Aqueous
    Matrices
    by Capillary
    Ion
    Electrophoresis,”
    SW846,
    Rev
    0,
    January
    1998.
    Method
    4140,
    “Inorganic
    Anions
    by Capillary
    Ion
    Electro
    phoresis,”
    Standard
    Met
    hods for
    the Examination
    of Water
    and
    Wastewater,
    20h1
    Edition,
    1998,
    p.
    4—12
    to 4—20.
    Krol, Benvenuti,
    and Romano,
    “Ion
    Analysis
    Methods
    for IC
    and
    CIA
    and
    Practical
    Aspects
    of
    Capillary
    Ion
    Analysis
    Theory,”
    Waters
    Corp.,
    Lii
    Code WT-139,
    1998.
    Jandik,
    P., Bonn,
    G.,
    “Capillary
    Electrophoresis
    of Small
    Molecules
    and
    Tons,” VCH
    Publishers,
    1993.
    Romano,
    J.,
    Krol. J.
    “Capillary
    Ion
    Electrophoresis,
    an
    Environmental
    Method
    for
    the
    Determination
    of
    Anions
    in
    Water,”
    J. of
    Chromatography,
    Vol
    640,
    1993,
    p.
    403.
    Rornano,
    I.,
    “Capillary
    Ion Analysis:
    A Method
    for
    Deter
    mining
    Ions
    in Water
    and
    Solid
    Waste Leachates,”
    A,ner
    Lab.,
    May
    1993,
    p.
    4.
    Jones,
    W.,
    “Method
    Development
    Approaches
    for Ion
    Elec
    trophoresis,”
    J. of
    Chromatography,
    Vol
    640,
    1993,
    p.
    387.
    Jones,
    W., Jandik,
    P.,
    “Various
    Approaches
    to
    Analysis
    of
    Difficult
    Sample
    Matrices
    for
    Anions
    Using
    Capillary
    Electro
    phoresis,”
    J. of
    C’hromatography,
    Vol
    608, 1992,
    p.
    385.
    Bondoux,
    G., Jandik,
    P.,
    Jones,
    W.,
    “New
    Approaches
    to the
    Analysis
    of
    Low Level
    of
    Anions
    in Water,”
    J.
    of
    Chromatog
    raphy,
    Vol 602,
    1992,
    p.
    79.
    Jandik,
    P.,
    Jones,
    W.,
    Weston,
    A.. Brown,
    P.,
    “Electro
    phoretic
    Capillary
    Ion
    Analysis:
    Origins,
    Principles,
    and
    Ap
    plications,”
    LC•GC,
    Vol
    9,
    Number
    9,
    1991,
    p.
    634.
    Romano,
    J.,
    Jackson,
    P.,
    “Optimization
    of
    Inorganic
    Capil
    lary
    Electrophoresis
    for the
    Analysis
    of Anionic
    Solutes
    in
    Real
    Samples,”
    J. of Chromatography,
    Vol
    546,
    1991,
    p.
    411.
    Jandik,
    P.,
    Jones,
    W., “Optimization
    of Detection
    Sensitivity
    in the
    Capillary
    Electrophoresis
    of Inorganic
    Anions,”
    J.
    of
    Chromatography,
    Vol
    546, 1991,
    p.
    431.
    Jandik,
    P., Jones,
    W.,
    “Controlled
    Changes
    of
    Selectivity
    in
    the
    Separation
    of Ions
    by Capillary
    Electrophoresis,”
    J.
    of
    Chromatography,
    Vol 546,
    1991,
    p.
    445.
    Foret,
    R., et.al.,
    “Indirect
    Photometric
    Detection
    in
    Capillary
    Zone
    Electrophoresis,”
    J.
    of Chivmatography,
    Vol
    470,
    1989,
    p.
    299.
    Hjerte’n,
    S. et.
    al.,
    “Carrier-Free
    Zone
    Electrophoresis,
    Displacement
    Electrophoresis
    and Isoelectric
    Focusing
    in
    an
    Electrophoresis
    Apparatus,”
    J.
    of
    Chromatography,
    Vol
    403,
    1987,
    p.
    47.
    Serwe,
    M.,
    “New
    ASTM
    Standard:
    Recommended
    Operat
    ing
    Conditions
    for
    the Agilent
    CE,” Agilent
    Technologies
    Application
    Brief, Publication
    #
    5968—8660E.
    ASTM International
    takes
    no position
    respecting
    the validity
    of
    any
    patent
    rights
    asserted
    in
    connection
    with
    any
    item
    mentioned
    in this
    standard.
    Users
    of this standard
    are expressly
    advised
    that
    determination
    of
    the
    validity of
    any such patent
    rights,
    and the
    risk
    of
    infringement
    of such
    rights, are
    entirely
    their
    own
    responsibility.
    This
    standard
    is subject to
    revision
    at
    any time
    by
    the responsible
    technical
    committee
    and
    must be
    reviewed
    eve,y five
    years
    and
    if not revised,
    either reapproved
    or
    withdrawn.
    Your comments
    are invited
    either
    for revision
    of this standard
    orfor
    additional
    standards
    and should
    be
    addressed
    to
    ASTM
    Intemational
    Headquarters.
    Your
    comments
    will receive
    careful
    consideration
    at a
    meeting of
    the
    responsible
    technical
    committee,
    which
    you may
    attend. if
    you feel that
    your
    comments
    have
    not received
    a fair hearing
    you should
    make your
    views
    known
    to
    the ASTM
    Committee
    on Standards,
    at the
    address
    shown
    below
    This
    standard
    is
    copyrighted
    byASTM
    internationa4
    100 Barr
    Harbor
    Drive,
    PD
    Box C700, West
    Conshohocken,
    PA 19428-2959,
    United States.
    Individual
    reprints (single
    or multiple
    Copies)
    of this
    standard may
    be
    obtained by
    contacting
    ASTM at the
    above
    address
    or at
    610-832-9585
    (phone),
    610-832-9555
    (fax),
    or
    sen/ice
    @astm. org
    (e-mail);
    or through
    the
    ASTM website
    (www.astm.org).
    Anion
    .
    mgJL
    Solution
    Method
    Detection
    95
    %
    Confidence
    Concentration
    MDL, mg/L
    Interval mg/L
    Chloride
    0.204
    0.073
    0.047
    to 0.161
    Bromide
    0.210
    0.132
    0.08410 0.290
    Nitrite
    0.199
    0.102
    0.065
    to 0.223
    Sulfate
    0.205
    0.066
    0.042
    to
    0.145
    Nitrate
    0.207
    0.082
    0.052
    to 0.180
    Fluoride
    0.208
    0.032
    0.020
    to
    0.070
    Phosphate
    0.210
    0.102
    0.065
    to 0.224
    APPENDIX
    17

    Method
    for
    the
    Determination
    of
    Radium-228
    and
    Radium-226
    in
    Drinking
    Water
    by
    Gamma-ray
    Spectrometry
    Using
    HPGE
    or
    Ge(Li)
    Detectors
    December,
    2004
    Environmental
    Resource
    Center
    Georgia
    Institute
    for
    Technology
    Atlanta,
    GA
    Revision
    1.2

    Acknowledgements
    The
    Environmental
    Resources
    Center
    (ERC)
    would
    like
    to
    recognize
    the
    work
    contributed
    by
    the
    following
    individuals
    in
    the development,
    preparation
    and
    validation
    of
    this
    method.
    At
    ERC,
    James
    Gary
    for sample
    preparation,
    Dave
    Crowe
    for
    sample
    counting,
    Cliff
    Blackman
    for
    software
    assistance
    and
    Brad
    Addison
    at
    State
    of Georgia
    Department
    of
    Natural
    Resources, Drinking
    Water
    Program
    for
    contract
    support.
    Finally,
    at New
    Jersey
    Department
    of Health
    and Senior
    Services
    Laboratory,
    Bahman
    Parsa,
    Gail
    Suozzo,
    Reynaldo
    Obed
    and
    William
    Nemeth for their
    assistance
    by
    acting
    as
    a
    second
    laboratory
    to
    validate
    this method.
    11

    Table
    of
    Contents
    Section
    Page
    No.
    I-I
    Introduction
    I
    1 .0
    Scope
    and
    Application
    2
    2.0
    Summary
    of Method
    2
    3.0
    Definitions
    2
    4.0
    Interferences
    2
    5.0
    Safety
    3
    6.0
    Equipment
    and
    Supplies
    3
    7.0
    Reagents
    and
    Standards
    4
    8.0
    Sample
    Collection,
    Preservation
    and Storage
    5
    9.0
    Quality
    Control
    5
    10.0
    Calibration
    and
    Standardization
    9
    11.0
    Procedure
    12
    12.0
    Data
    Analysis
    and
    Calculations
    13
    13.0
    Method
    Performance
    15
    14.0
    Pollution Prevention
    16
    15.0
    Waste
    Management
    16
    16.0
    References
    17
    17.0
    Tables,
    Diagrams,
    Flowcharts,
    and
    Validation
    Data
    19
    18.0
    Glossary
    21
    111

    I-I.
    Introduction
    To
    lower
    the
    cancer
    risks of
    the consumers
    of
    drinking
    water
    provided
    by Public
    Water
    Supplies
    (PWSs),
    the
    Safe
    Drinking
    Water
    Act
    (SDWA)
    requires
    PWSs
    to measure,
    at a
    minimum,
    the
    gross
    alpha
    particle
    activity
    of
    their
    finished
    water at
    specific
    intervals
    appropriate
    to the
    specific
    local
    conditions
    of
    each water
    supply.
    Additionally,
    concern
    related
    to the
    radium-228
    (Ra-228)
    content
    of
    drinking
    waters
    has
    resulted
    in the
    requirement
    finished
    waters
    intended
    for
    public
    consumption
    from
    PWSs
    be
    analyzed
    for
    this
    carcinogen,
    in addition
    to the
    gross
    alpha
    particle
    activity,
    beginning
    with
    the compliance
    monitoring
    period
    starting
    on December
    8, 2003.
    If
    the gross
    alpha
    radioactivity
    measured
    for
    a PWS
    is above
    5
    pCiIL,
    then
    the measurement
    of
    the
    regulated
    contaminant,
    radium-226
    (Ra-226)
    is also
    required.
    These
    requirements
    will
    have
    the consequence
    of a tremendous
    increase
    of
    the
    number
    Ra-228
    measurements
    that
    must
    be
    made,
    as
    well
    as the
    likelihood
    both
    Ra-226
    and Ra-228
    must
    be measured
    in
    the same
    sample,
    increasing
    the
    number
    of measurements
    required.
    While
    other
    EPA-approved
    radium
    methods
    can provide
    sufficient
    accuracy
    and precision
    for
    the
    purposes
    of
    the
    SDWA
    monitoring
    program,
    they
    all share
    the
    general
    assessment
    by
    radiochemists
    after
    using
    them
    that
    they
    are
    labor
    intensive
    and
    time consuming.
    They
    all
    require
    several
    isolation
    and
    purification
    steps
    involving
    sequential
    precipitations
    from
    analytically
    large
    volumes,
    then
    possibly
    liquid-liquid
    extractions
    (depending
    on
    the
    particular
    method).
    They
    all end
    with a final
    preparation
    step
    for
    measurement
    either
    by gas
    proportional
    counting
    (EPA
    903.0,
    EPA
    904.0,
    etc),
    or by
    evolving
    a
    gaseous
    daughter
    product
    from the
    radionuclide
    of
    interest
    from
    the
    sample,
    then
    measuring
    it
    with
    an alpha
    scintillation
    detection
    system
    (EPA
    903.1,
    etc).
    Additionally,
    training
    periods
    for technicians
    performing
    these
    methods
    are
    long
    because
    of the numerous
    steps and
    the
    time
    involved
    in
    performing
    these analyses,
    increasing
    their overall
    cost.
    This draft
    method
    has
    been
    developed
    in
    an effort
    to provide
    a more
    cost-effective
    alternative
    that
    reduces
    the
    labor
    and
    time
    required
    for processing
    samples
    for
    these
    analyses.
    It
    utilizes
    the
    initial
    precipitation
    steps found
    in
    the
    approved
    methods,
    but
    utilizes
    gamma-ray
    spectrometry
    techniques
    for
    detection
    and
    quantitation
    using
    High
    Purity
    Germanium
    (HpGe)
    detectors.
    Lithium-drifted
    Germanium
    (Ge(Li))
    detectors
    may
    also
    be used,
    but
    will
    require
    larger
    volumes
    of
    sample
    since they
    have
    lower
    detection
    efficiencies
    than
    the HpGe
    detectors.
    Unlike
    sodium
    iodide
    gamma-ray
    detectors,
    these
    solid
    state
    detectors
    have
    sufficient
    spectral
    resolution
    so that
    peaks
    unique
    to
    the
    daughter
    progeny
    of
    Ra-226
    and
    Ra-228
    can be quantitatively
    measured
    in shorter
    count
    times
    typically
    used
    for
    gas
    proportional
    measurements
    of these
    regulated
    contaminants.

    1.0
    Scope
    and
    Application
    1.1
    This
    method
    describes
    the
    measurement
    of
    Radium-226
    (Ra-226,
    CAS
    Registry
    No.13982-63-3)
    and
    Radium-228 (Ra-228,
    CAS
    Registry
    No.
    15262-20-1)
    in
    finished
    drinking
    water
    matrices
    in
    the
    same
    com
    pliance
    monitoring
    sample.
    This
    method
    can
    also
    be
    used
    to measure
    them
    separately
    if only
    one
    of
    these
    analyses
    is
    required.
    These
    data
    may
    be used
    in the
    Environmental
    Protection
    Agency’s
    (EPA’s)
    data
    gathering
    and monitoring programs
    under
    the
    Safe
    Drinking
    Water
    Act.
    It
    utilizes
    the
    initial
    precipitation
    steps
    for
    these
    analytes
    found
    in
    methods
    903.0,
    904.0,
    Ra-05,
    and
    other
    similar
    methods,
    but uses
    gamma-
    ray
    spectrometry
    techniques
    for
    detection
    and
    quantitation
    instead
    of
    gas proportional
    counting.
    Analytical
    test
    conditions
    are
    selected
    to
    ensure
    the
    required
    detection
    limit
    of
    I pCi/L
    can be
    achieved
    routinely
    according
    to the
    capabilities
    of
    each
    laboratory
    that
    chooses
    to
    utilize
    this
    method.
    Since
    the
    method
    of
    detection’s calibration
    efficiency
    is linear
    with
    respect
    to
    intensity,
    it
    has
    a
    quantitative
    analytical
    range
    of
    several
    orders
    of magnitude.
    1.2
    Each
    laboratory that uses
    this
    method
    must
    demonstrate
    the
    ability
    to
    generate
    acceptable
    results
    using
    the
    procedure
    in
    Section
    9.2.
    2.0
    Summary of Method
    2.1
    An aliquant
    from
    a
    sample
    (whose
    volume
    is
    appropriate
    for
    the
    efficiency
    of
    the detector
    and
    projected
    count
    time so
    that
    a
    detection
    limit
    of I
    pCi/L
    can be
    achieved)
    is
    poured
    into
    a borosilicate
    beaker
    sufficiently
    large
    to
    hold the
    entire
    sample.
    A solution
    of barium
    chloride
    is added
    to the
    aliquant
    of
    sample
    to
    serve
    as
    carrier.
    The
    sample
    is
    then stirred
    and
    heated
    to
    boiling.
    Concentrated
    sulfuric
    acid
    is
    added
    to
    the heated
    sample
    and
    radium
    is
    collected
    by
    coprecipitating
    it as
    a
    sulfate.
    2.2
    The
    precipitate
    is collected
    on
    preweighed
    filter paper,
    then
    dried
    and
    reweighed
    to
    obtain
    a net
    weight
    of
    precipitate
    to
    assess
    the
    chemical
    efficiency
    of the
    coprecipitation.
    The
    filter
    paper
    holding
    the
    precipitate
    is
    placed
    into
    containers
    whose
    geometry
    is
    appropriate
    for the
    type
    of gamma-ray
    detector
    being
    used.
    2.3
    The
    prepared
    samples
    can
    either
    be
    directly
    measured
    for
    their
    Ra-228
    content,
    or set
    aside for
    a
    minimum
    ingrowth
    period
    appropriate
    for
    each
    measurement
    (from
    5
    days
    to
    2 weeks
    for
    Ra-226,
    or
    both
    measurements).
    After
    the
    necessary
    ingrowth
    period,
    the
    sample
    is
    counted
    with
    a gamma-ray
    spectrometry
    system
    to
    determine
    the
    content
    of the
    regulated
    contaminants
    for a
    count
    time
    previously
    determined
    to
    achieve
    the
    required
    detection
    limit.
    2.4
    Quality
    is
    assured
    by
    repeated
    testing
    of the
    precipitation,
    counting,
    and
    gravimetric
    systems.
    3.0
    Definitions
    3.1
    Definitions
    for
    terms
    used
    in
    this method
    are
    given
    in section
    18,
    Glossary of Definitions
    and
    Purposes.
    4.0
    Interferences
    4.1
    Reagents, glassware,
    and
    other
    sample-processing
    hardware
    may
    yield
    artifacts
    that affect
    results.
    Specific
    selection
    of
    reagents
    is required
    to
    ensure
    no
    traces
    of
    the
    analytes
    are
    present.
    The
    glassware
    and
    sample
    processing hardware
    is
    cleaned
    by
    washing
    in hot
    water
    and
    a
    detergent
    designed
    to
    remove
    radioactive
    compounds,
    then
    rinsing
    them
    in tap
    water,
    and
    a final
    rinse
    in
    deionized
    water.
    All
    glassware
    must
    also
    receive
    an
    acid rinse
    to
    ensure
    contaminant
    removal
    and
    to hydrate
    the
    outer
    layers
    of silica,
    making
    them
    more
    resistant
    to
    contamination.
    This
    is
    followed
    by
    a final
    rinse
    in deionized
    water.
    4.2
    All
    materials
    used
    in
    the
    analysis
    shall
    be
    demonstrated
    to be
    free
    from interferences
    under
    the
    conditions
    of
    analysis
    by
    running
    laboratory
    blanks
    as
    described
    in Section
    9.4.
    4.3
    Excess
    barium
    and
    strontium
    in
    the drinking
    water
    sample
    can
    result
    in high
    chemical
    yields,
    sometimes
    exceeding
    100
    percent
    recovery.
    Since
    their
    concentrations
    are
    restricted
    in
    finished
    drinking
    water
    to
    low
    2

    levels,
    the
    related
    bias
    would
    only
    be
    a
    concern
    if
    this method
    is used
    to measure
    source
    or waste
    waters.
    4.4
    Interferences
    separated
    from
    samples
    will
    vary
    considerably
    from
    source
    to source,
    depending
    upon
    the
    diversity
    of
    the site
    being
    sampled.
    5.0
    Safety
    5.1
    The
    toxicity
    or carcinogenicity
    of each
    reagent
    and radioactive
    standards
    used
    in this
    method
    has
    not
    been
    precisely
    determined;
    however,
    each
    chemical
    should
    be
    treated
    as
    a potential
    health
    hazard.
    Exposure
    to
    these chemicals
    and
    radioactive
    standards
    should
    be
    reduced
    to
    the lowest
    possible
    level.
    It
    is
    suggested
    that
    the
    laboratory
    perform
    personal
    hygiene
    monitoring
    of
    each
    analyst
    using
    this
    method,
    and
    all
    analysts
    should
    wear
    radiation
    dosimetry
    badges
    while
    performing
    this
    method
    to monitor
    their exposure
    to
    ionizing
    radiation.
    The
    results
    of this
    monitoring
    must
    be
    made
    available
    to the
    analyst.
    5.2
    Sample
    containers
    should
    be
    opened
    in
    a
    restricted
    area
    with
    caution
    and
    handled
    with
    gloves
    to
    prevent
    exposure.
    5.3
    This
    method
    does
    not address
    all safety
    issues
    associated
    with
    its use.
    The
    laboratory
    is responsible
    for
    maintaining
    a safe
    work
    environment
    and a
    current
    awareness
    file of
    OSHA
    regulations
    regarding
    the
    safe
    handling
    of the
    chemicals
    specified
    in
    this method.
    A reference
    file of
    material
    safety
    data
    sheets
    (MSDSs)
    should
    be
    available
    to
    all
    personnel involved
    in
    these
    analyses.
    Additional
    information
    on
    laboratory
    safety
    can
    be found
    in References
    16.4—16.6.
    5.4
    Diethyl
    ether (also
    referred
    to as
    “ethyl
    ether”)
    is an
    extremely
    flammable
    solvent,
    and
    may form
    explosive
    peroxides
    during
    storage.
    Diethyl
    ether
    also
    is
    considered
    a
    skin,
    eye, and
    respiratory
    irritant.
    This
    reagent
    should
    be
    used in
    a well
    ventilated
    area
    (e.g.,
    a fume
    hood),
    kept away
    from
    ignition
    sources,
    and
    handled
    by
    analysts
    wearing
    appropriate
    protective-wear
    (e.g.,
    safety
    glasses
    or
    goggles).
    For
    additional
    information
    on this
    substance
    please
    consult
    the
    Material
    Safety
    Data
    Sheet
    (MSDS)
    for
    diethyl
    ether.
    6.0
    Equipment
    and
    Supplies
    Note:
    Brand
    names,
    suppliers,
    and
    part
    numbers
    are
    for
    illustrative
    purposes
    only.
    No
    endorsement
    is
    implied.
    Equivalent performance
    may
    be
    achieved
    using
    apparatus
    and
    materials
    other
    than
    those
    specified
    here,
    but
    demonstration of
    equivalent
    performance
    that meets
    the
    requirements
    of
    this
    method
    is the
    responsibility
    of
    the
    laboratory.
    6.1
    Sampling equipment.
    6.1.1
    Sample
    collection
    bottles—Plastic,
    with screw
    cap. Sample
    collection
    bottles
    should
    be
    of an
    appropriate
    volume
    to minimize
    the
    number
    of containers
    required
    per
    sample.
    Each
    sample
    must
    have
    a
    minimum
    of 4
    aliquants
    of
    volume
    available
    so they
    may
    be
    available
    to
    be used
    as
    a
    batch
    QC
    sample
    and have
    at least
    one
    aliquant
    available in
    the
    event
    retesting
    becomes
    necessary.
    6.1.2
    Bottles
    and lids
    must
    be
    lot-certified
    to
    be
    free
    of
    artifacts
    by i’unning
    laboratory
    blanks
    according
    to this
    method
    (per Section
    9.4).
    6.2
    Equipment
    for
    glassware
    cleaning.
    6.2.1
    Laboratory
    dishwasher.
    If one
    is not
    available,
    then
    the
    laboratory
    must
    have
    a
    dishwashing
    station
    set
    up consisting
    of the
    minimum
    of
    a sink
    for
    washing
    and
    rinsing
    glassware,
    and
    a
    drying
    rack.
    6.2.2
    A nonmetallic
    tub
    or
    vat
    with
    a
    minimum
    volume
    of
    30 L to
    hold
    the acidic
    solutions
    used
    for
    acid
    rinsing.
    It
    must also
    have
    a cover
    that
    can
    be placed
    over
    it when
    it
    is not
    in use.
    3

    6.2.3
    A source
    of ASTM
    Type
    2 reagent
    water
    to use
    for
    a final
    rinse
    for glassware.
    6.3
    Equipment
    for
    calibration.
    6.3.1
    Analytical
    balance—a
    readability
    of
    0.01 mg
    is required.
    6.3.2
    Volumetric
    flasks—Glass,
    100 mL,
    500
    mL,
    1000
    mL and
    2000
    mL
    6.3.3
    Bottles—Assorted
    sizes, with
    PTFE-lined
    screw
    caps
    reagent
    storage
    6.3.4
    Volumetric
    pipettes—Glass,
    1
    mL, 5 mL
    6.3.5
    Gamma-ray
    spectrometry
    system
    utilizing
    either
    High
    Purity
    Germanium
    (HPGe)
    or
    lithium
    drifted
    germanium
    (Ge
    (Li))detectors.
    6.4
    Equipment
    for
    sample
    precipitation.
    6.4.1
    Beaker—must
    be made
    of a
    heat resistant
    borosilicate
    glass
    and
    capable
    of
    holding
    the volume
    of sample
    necessary
    to reach
    the required
    detection
    limit.
    6.4.2
    Heated
    magnetic
    stirrer
    6.4.3
    PTFE-coated
    magnetic
    stirring
    bars
    6.4.4
    Volumetric
    flasks
    2000
    mL
    6.5
    Equipment
    for
    collecting
    precipitate.
    6.5.1
    Filtering
    apparatus—
    25
    mm
    or
    47 mm
    diameter
    filter
    funnel
    that
    is mounted
    on either
    a
    manifold
    connected
    to
    a
    vacuum
    source
    or to
    a vacuum
    flask that
    is connected
    to a vacuum
    source.
    6.5.2
    Filter paper—
    Membrane,
    0.45
    im
    porosity,
    25 mm
    or 47
    mm
    diameter,
    whichever
    is
    appro
    priate for
    the filter
    funnel.
    6.5.3
    Sample
    containers
    for
    the selected
    geometry,
    such
    as
    stainless
    steel
    planchets,
    plastic
    Petri
    dishes
    or
    vials
    of the
    appropriate
    size
    to
    fit
    into
    the
    well
    of a
    deep
    well
    gamma-ray
    detector
    6.5.4
    Drying
    lamp
    6.6
    Equipment
    for yield
    determination.
    6.6.1
    Analytical
    Balance—
    a
    readability
    of 0.01
    mg
    is required.
    6.7
    Equipment
    for
    counting
    gamma
    rays
    from
    analytes.
    6.7.1
    Gamma-ray
    spectrometry
    system
    utilizing
    either
    High
    Purity
    Germanium
    (HPGe)
    or
    lithium-
    drifted
    germanium
    (Ge(Li))detectors.
    7.0
    Reagents
    and
    Standards
    7.1
    Reagent
    water—Standard
    Methods
    (see
    reference
    16.2)
    requires
    reagent
    water
    for radiochemistry
    methods
    meet
    the
    requirement
    specified
    as ASTM
    Type
    2 reagent
    water.
    Distilled
    water,
    deionized
    water
    or water
    prepared
    by
    passage
    of tap
    water through
    activated
    carbon
    have
    been
    shown
    to be
    acceptable
    sources
    of
    reagent
    water.
    The
    reagent
    water’s resistivity
    must
    be
    checked
    prior
    to its
    use to prepare
    samples
    or
    standards
    to
    ensure
    it
    is of adequate
    quality
    for
    use
    with
    this method.
    7.2
    Hydrochloric
    acid,
    HC1 (12
    N)
    7.3
    Sulfuric
    acid,
    H
    2
    S0
    4
    (18
    N)
    :
    cautiously
    add, with
    stirring,
    500
    mL 36
    N
    H
    2
    50
    4
    to 400
    mL
    water and
    dilute to
    1 L.
    7.4
    Ethanol—ACS, residue less
    than
    I mg/L.
    7.5
    Diethyl
    ether.
    7.6
    Nitric
    Acid,
    HNO
    3
    (16 N)
    7.7
    Barium
    carrier
    Ba - 9
    mg/mL.
    Dissolve
    16.01
    grams
    of
    Ba Cl
    2
    —2
    H
    20
    in
    water,
    add
    5
    mL
    16 N HNO
    3
    ,
    and dilute
    to
    1 L
    with reagent
    water.
    7.8
    Ra-226
    spiking
    standard
    solution;
    for matrix
    spikes
    and matrix
    spike
    duplicates.
    4

    7.8.1
    Use
    a
    NIST
    traceable
    Ra-226
    standard
    when
    available
    that
    is from
    a different
    source
    than
    the
    one
    used
    to
    prepare
    the
    efficiency
    calibration
    standard
    7.8.2
    The
    calibration
    certificates
    for
    these
    standardized
    solutions
    most
    often
    report
    their
    concentrations
    as
    an activity
    per volume
    weight.
    When
    extracting
    the standard
    solution
    from the
    container
    it
    arrives
    in,
    the
    total
    net weight
    of
    solution
    should
    be
    measured
    to ensure
    the
    reported
    total
    activity
    is
    accurate.
    7.8.3
    Before
    diluting
    it, calculate
    a final
    dilution
    volume
    that
    will
    provide
    an
    activity
    between
    5
    and
    10
    pCiImL.
    7.8.4
    Use
    a
    Class
    a
    volumetric
    flask that
    will contain
    all
    the calculated
    final
    volume.
    7.8.5
    Use a
    diluent
    that
    has
    the
    same
    molar
    concentration
    and
    is of
    the
    same
    type
    of
    acid
    used
    to
    produce
    the
    original
    standardized
    solution.
    7.8.6
    Pour
    approximately
    75 percent
    of the
    diluent
    into
    the
    volumetric
    flask.
    7.8.7
    Weigh
    the
    standard
    in its
    original
    container.
    7.8.8
    Remove
    the
    standardized
    solution
    from the
    balance
    and
    pour
    its
    contents
    into
    the volumetric
    flask.
    Wash
    the
    original
    container
    three
    times
    with
    some
    of the
    remaining
    diluent,
    and
    pour
    these
    washings
    into
    the volumetric
    flask.
    7.8.9
    Wash
    the
    original
    container
    with
    ethanol
    to
    remove
    any
    remaining
    rinse solution
    and
    discard
    it
    since
    it should
    not have
    any
    activity.
    Set aside
    to
    dry.
    Once
    dry,
    record
    its
    weight.
    7.8.10
    Slowly
    bring
    the volume
    of
    diluted
    solution
    in the
    volumetric
    flask
    up to
    the white
    line
    that
    represents
    its
    calibrated
    volume.
    Ensure
    the
    final
    volume
    is
    not
    above
    this
    line.
    7.8.11
    Subtract
    the
    weight
    of the
    empty
    original
    container
    from
    the
    weight
    of
    the container
    and
    original
    solution.
    Compare
    this to
    the weight
    reported
    on
    the
    calibration
    certificate.
    7.8.12
    If
    different,
    use
    the
    determined
    net
    total
    weight
    of
    the
    standardized
    solution
    and multiply
    it
    by the
    activity
    per gram
    reported
    on
    the
    calibration
    certificate,
    then
    divide
    it by
    the volume
    of
    diluent
    in
    the final
    working
    solution.
    Use
    this
    result
    when
    using
    a final
    activity
    per
    mL
    for the
    standard.
    7.9
    Ra-228
    Standard
    spiking
    solution.
    Use
    the
    same
    steps
    as in
    section
    7.8
    used
    to
    prepare
    the
    Ra-226
    standard
    spiking
    solution.
    7.10
    AlternateCarrier:
    Pb
    2
    Carrier
    —20
    mg!mL.
    Dissolve
    32
    g
    of
    Pb(N0
    3
    )
    2
    in
    water.
    Add 5
    mL 16N
    HNO
    3
    and
    dilute
    to I L
    with reagent
    water.
    8.0
    Sample
    Collection, Preservation,
    and
    Storage
    8.1
    Collect
    a
    sufficient
    volume
    of sample
    so
    that a
    minimum
    of
    4 aliquants
    of
    sample
    can
    be
    prepared
    from
    it.
    This
    provides
    sufficient
    volume
    that
    a sample,
    a Matrix
    Spike
    (MS)
    and
    Matrix
    Spike
    Duplicate
    (MSD)
    pair
    may
    be
    prepared
    from each
    collected
    sample,
    with
    one
    aliquant
    volume
    left
    for
    reserve
    in
    case
    the
    sample
    must
    be
    remeasured.
    Plastic
    bottles
    or
    cubitainers
    may
    be used
    to
    collect
    the
    sample
    following
    conventional
    sampling
    procedures.
    8.2
    Once
    collected,
    samples
    for
    these
    analyses
    must
    be preserved
    within
    5
    days
    of
    collection
    by adding
    sufficient
    concentrated
    nitric
    acid
    so
    that the
    collected
    sample
    has a
    pH
    of
    less than
    2 as specified
    in
    Table
    17.2.
    8.3
    All
    samples
    must
    be analyzed
    within
    prescribed
    maximum
    holding
    time
    after
    collection
    in
    Table
    17.2.
    9.0
    Quality
    Control
    9.1
    Each
    laboratory
    that
    uses
    this method
    is required
    to operate
    a formal
    quality
    assurance
    program
    (Reference
    16.8).
    For
    each
    method
    the
    laboratory
    uses to
    report
    compliance
    monitoring
    results,
    the
    minimum
    requirements
    of
    this program
    consist
    of
    an initial
    demonstration
    of analyst
    capability,
    ongoing
    analyses
    of
    5

    standards
    and
    reagent
    blanks
    as
    a test
    of
    continued
    accuracy
    and freedom
    from
    interferences,
    and
    analyses
    of
    matrix
    spike
    (MS)
    and
    matrix
    spike
    duplicate
    (MSD)
    samples
    to
    assess
    precision
    and
    provide
    an
    additional
    metric
    of
    accuracy.
    Laboratory
    analyst
    performance
    is compared
    to established
    performance
    criteria
    to
    determine
    if
    the
    results
    of
    analyses
    meet
    the
    performance
    characteristics
    of the
    method.
    9.1.1
    The
    analyst
    shall
    make
    an
    initial
    demonstration
    of
    ability
    to generate
    acceptable
    accuracy
    and
    precision
    with
    this method.
    This
    ability
    is established
    as
    described
    below.
    9.1.2
    Each
    sample
    analytical
    batch
    must
    include
    Quality
    Control
    (QC)
    samples
    to demonstrate
    the
    overall
    accuracy,
    precision
    and
    freedom
    from
    interferences
    for
    the analyses.
    Analysis
    of
    a Matrix
    Spike
    (MS)
    is
    done
    to
    demonstrate
    accuracy.
    Precision
    can
    be demonstrated
    by using
    a
    second
    aliquant
    of
    the
    sample
    selected
    to
    produce
    the
    MS
    to
    produce
    a
    Matrix
    Spike
    Duplicate
    (MSD).
    The
    criteria
    for
    spiking
    samples
    are
    described
    in
    Section
    9.3.
    9.1.3
    Alternatively,
    the
    MSD
    may
    be
    replaced
    by
    using
    a
    second
    aliquant
    of a
    sample
    to
    duplicate
    the
    measurement
    (DUP),
    then
    comparing
    their
    results
    to
    assess
    precision.
    The
    criteria
    for
    duplicating
    samples
    are described
    in Section
    9.4.
    9.1.4
    An
    analysis
    of a Reagent
    Blank
    (RB)
    is required
    to demonstrate
    the
    reagents,
    sample
    processing
    glassware,
    and
    workspace
    are free
    from
    contamination
    that
    will
    interfere
    with
    the
    measurements
    of
    the
    samples
    in
    each
    analytical
    batch.
    The
    results
    of
    RBs
    shall
    be
    recorded
    and
    monitored
    to
    ensure
    interferences
    in the
    analysis
    system
    remain
    in control.
    The
    criteria
    for
    RBs
    are described
    in
    Section
    9.5.
    9.1.5
    The laboratory
    shall
    demonstrate
    calibration
    verification
    for each
    analytical
    batch
    of samples
    by
    measuring
    a
    Laboratory
    Fortified
    Blank
    (LFB).
    The
    results
    of
    the LFBs
    shall
    be
    recorded
    and
    monitored
    to
    ensure
    the analysis
    system
    remains
    in
    control.
    These
    procedures
    are
    described
    in
    Section
    9.6.
    9.1.6
    The laboratory
    must
    maintain
    records
    to define
    the
    quality
    of
    data
    that
    is generated.
    Development
    of
    accuracy
    statements
    should
    be
    completed
    as described
    in Sections
    9.3.7 and
    9.6.3.
    9.1.7
    For
    this
    procedure,
    a
    sample
    preparation
    batch
    is
    a
    set of
    samples
    precipitated
    at
    the same
    time,
    and
    must
    not
    exceed
    20
    samples.
    Each
    sample
    preparation
    batch
    must
    also
    include
    the
    four
    Quality
    Control
    samples
    described
    in sections
    9.1.2.
    though
    9.2.5
    for a maximum
    number
    of
    samples
    in
    each
    sample
    preparation
    batch
    of 24.
    If
    greater
    than
    20 samples
    are
    to be
    precipitated
    at
    one
    time,
    the
    samples
    must
    be
    separated
    into
    two sample
    preparation
    batches
    of 20
    or fewer
    samples.
    9.2
    Initial
    Demonstration
    of
    Laboratory
    Capability
    9.2.1
    Initial
    precision
    and
    recovery
    (IPR)—To
    establish
    the ability
    to generate
    acceptable
    precision
    and
    accuracy,
    the
    analyst
    shall
    perform
    the
    following
    operations:
    9.2.1.1
    Prepare
    four
    samples
    by
    using
    4
    to 8 L
    of
    ASTM
    type
    I or
    II
    deionized
    water
    and
    add
    a
    sufficient
    volume
    of
    Ra-226
    and
    Ra-228
    standard
    spiking
    solutions
    so
    that
    both
    radioanalyte concentrations
    are
    between
    5
    and
    10
    times
    their
    required
    detection
    limits.
    Divide
    the
    volumes equally
    into
    four
    aliquants.
    9.2.1.2
    Using
    the
    results
    of the
    set of
    four analyses,
    compute
    the
    average
    percent
    recovery
    (Pay)
    and
    the standard
    deviation
    of
    the
    percent
    recovery
    (s)
    for Ra-226
    and
    for
    Ra-228
    (if determined).
    Use the
    following
    equation
    for
    calculation
    of
    the standard
    deviation
    of the
    percent
    recovery:
    and
    S=/___j(Pi_Pav)2
    (1)
    6

    where:
    n
    =
    number
    of
    samples
    F,
    =
    percent
    recovery
    for
    each
    sample
    Pav
    average
    percent
    recovery
    for
    all samples
    s =
    standard
    deviation
    of
    the
    percent
    recovery
    9.2.1.3
    Compare
    s afld
    Pay
    with
    the
    corresponding
    limits
    for
    initial
    precision
    and recovery
    in
    Table
    17.1.
    If
    s
    and
    Pay
    meet
    the
    acceptance
    criteria,
    system
    performance
    is
    ac
    ceptable
    and
    analysis
    of
    samples
    may
    begin.
    If,
    however,
    s
    exceeds
    the
    precision
    limit
    or
    Pay
    falls
    outside
    the
    range
    for
    recovery,
    system
    performance is
    unacceptable.
    In
    this event,
    correct
    the
    problem
    and
    repeat
    the
    test.
    9.3
    Matrix
    Spikes
    9.3.1
    The
    laboratory must
    spike,
    in duplicate,
    a
    minimum
    of
    5
    percent
    of
    all
    samples
    (one
    sample
    in
    each
    batch
    of
    twenty samples.
    The
    two
    sample
    aliquants
    shall
    be spiked
    with
    the
    Ra-226
    and
    Ra-228
    spiking solutions.
    9.3.1.1
    Prepare
    a
    spiking
    solution that
    will
    produce
    an
    activity
    concentration
    between
    3 and
    5
    pCi/L
    (between
    3 times
    the
    required
    detection
    limit
    and
    the
    combined
    MCL
    for
    these
    radioanalytes)
    when
    added
    to each
    aliquant
    selected
    for spiking.
    9.3.1.2
    Analyze
    the
    first
    sample
    aliquant
    according
    to the
    procedure
    beginning
    in
    Section
    11
    to
    determine
    the background
    concentration
    of
    Ra-226
    and
    Ra-228.
    9.3.1.3
    Spike
    the two
    aliquants
    selected
    for
    spiking,
    then
    also
    measure them
    according
    to
    the
    procedure
    beginning
    in Section
    11.
    9.3.1.4
    Calculate
    the
    percent
    recovery
    (F)
    of
    Ra-226
    and
    Ra-228
    in each
    aliquant
    using
    the
    following
    equation:
    (A—B)xlOO%
    (2)
    T
    where:
    A
    is the
    total
    activity
    concentration
    of
    the
    analyte
    of
    interest
    B
    is the
    background
    concentration
    of
    the
    analyte
    of
    interest
    T
    is the
    activity
    concentration
    of
    the
    analyte added
    to
    the
    sample
    9.3.1.5
    Compare
    the
    percent
    recovery
    of
    the
    Ra-226
    and
    Ra-228
    with
    the
    corresponding
    QC
    acceptance
    criteria
    in Table
    17.1.
    9.3.1.6
    If
    the
    results
    of
    the spike
    fail the
    acceptance
    criteria,
    and
    the
    recovery
    of
    the
    QC
    standard
    in
    the
    ongoing
    precision
    and
    recovery
    test
    (Section
    9.6)
    for
    the
    analytical
    batch
    is
    within
    the
    acceptance
    criteria
    in
    Table
    17.1,
    an
    interference
    is
    present.
    In
    this
    case,
    the
    result
    may
    not
    be
    reported
    for
    regulatory
    compliance
    purposes
    and
    the
    analyst
    must
    assess
    the
    potential
    cause
    for
    the interference.
    If
    the
    interference
    is
    attributable
    to
    sampling,
    the
    site or
    discharge
    should
    be
    resampled.
    If
    the
    interference
    is
    attributable
    to
    a method
    deficiency,
    the
    analyst
    must
    modify
    the
    method,
    repeat
    the
    tests
    required
    in
    Section
    9.1.2,
    and
    repeat
    the
    analysis
    of
    the
    sample
    and
    the
    MS/MSD.
    7

    9.3.1.7
    If the
    results
    of
    both the
    spike
    and
    the
    ongoing
    precision
    and
    recovery
    test
    fail
    the
    acceptance
    criteria,
    the
    analytical
    system
    is
    judged
    to
    be
    out of
    control,
    the
    problem
    shall be
    identified
    and
    corrected,
    and
    the
    sample
    shall
    be
    reanalyzed.
    9.4
    Precision
    Assessments
    Compute
    the
    relative
    percent
    difference
    (RPD)
    between
    the
    two
    results
    of
    either
    the sample
    and
    its duplicate
    measurement
    or
    between
    the
    Matrix
    Spike
    and
    the
    Matrix
    Spike
    Duplicate
    (not
    between
    the two
    recoveries)
    using
    the
    following
    equation:
    where:
    A
    1
    -A
    RPD=
    21
    xlOO%
    (A
    1
    +A
    2
    )12.
    A
    1
    is the
    concentration
    of
    Ra-226
    or Ra-228
    in
    the sample
    A
    2
    is
    the concentration
    of Ra-226
    or
    Ra-228
    in
    the
    second
    (duplicate)
    sample
    (3)
    9.4.2
    The
    relative
    percent
    difference
    for the
    duplicate
    measurements
    shall
    meet
    the acceptance
    criteria
    in
    Table
    17.1.
    If the
    criteria
    are
    not
    met,
    the
    analytical
    system
    is judged
    to
    be out
    of control,
    and
    the
    problem
    must
    be immediately
    identified
    and
    corrected,
    and
    the
    analytical
    batch
    reanalyzed.
    9.4.3
    As
    part of
    the
    QC
    program
    for
    the
    laboratory,
    method
    precision
    and accuracy
    for
    samples
    should
    be
    assessed
    and
    records
    should
    be
    maintained.
    After
    the
    analysis
    of
    five spiked
    samples
    in which
    the
    recovery
    passes
    the
    test in
    Section
    9.3.4,
    compute
    the
    average
    percent
    recovery
    (Pa)
    and
    the
    standard
    deviation
    of
    the
    percent
    recovery
    (sr). Express
    the accuracy
    assessment
    as a percent
    recovery
    interval
    from
    Pa
    2s
    to
    Pa
    +
    2s.
    For example,
    f
    Pa
    = 90 %
    and
    s
    =
    10
    % for
    five
    analyses
    of Ra-226
    and
    for
    Ra-228,
    the
    accuracy
    interval
    is expressed
    as 70
    O,/1lo
    %.
    Update
    the
    accuracy
    assessment
    on a regular
    basis (e.g.,
    after
    each
    five
    to ten
    new
    accuracy
    measurements).
    9.5
    Reagent
    Blanks
    for
    Contamination
    Checks
    9.5.1
    Reagent
    water
    blanks
    are
    analyzed
    to demonstrate
    freedom
    from
    contamination.
    9.5.2
    Precipitate
    a sample
    prepared
    with
    laboratory
    reagent
    water
    using
    the same
    volume
    as
    samples
    with
    each
    analytical
    batch.
    The
    blank
    must
    be subjected
    to the
    same
    procedural
    steps
    as a sample.
    9.5.3
    If
    material
    is
    detected
    in the
    blank
    at a
    concentration
    greater
    than
    the
    Minimum
    Level
    required
    by
    EPA
    of
    1 pCiIL,
    analysis
    of
    samples
    is
    halted
    until the
    source
    of
    contamination
    is eliminated
    and a
    blank
    shows
    no
    evidence
    of
    contamination.
    All
    samples
    must
    be associated
    with
    an
    uncontaminated
    method
    blank
    before
    the
    results
    may be
    reported
    for
    regulatory
    compliance
    purposes.
    9.6
    Laboratory
    Fortified
    Blanks
    for
    Ongoing
    Precision
    and Recovery
    Assessments
    9.6.1
    One
    sample
    shall
    be
    prepared
    with
    reagent
    water
    that
    is spiked
    with
    a known
    amount
    of
    analyte
    to
    assess
    the
    Ongoing
    Precision
    and
    Recovery
    method
    performance
    that
    is independent
    of
    matrix
    effects.
    9.6.1.1
    Precipitate
    a spiked
    aliquant
    of
    laboratory
    reagent
    water
    at
    the same
    volume
    as
    samples
    with
    each
    analytical
    batch.
    This
    Laboratory
    Fortified
    Blank
    (LFB)
    must
    be
    subjected
    to
    the same
    procedural
    steps
    as
    the samples.
    9.6.1.2
    Spike
    the
    LFB with
    enough
    Ra-226
    and
    Ra-228
    so
    the
    activity
    concentration
    is
    approximately
    5
    pCi/L.
    9.6.1.3
    Evaluate
    using
    Equation
    2 where
    B
    = 0.
    9.6.2
    Compare
    the concentration
    with
    the
    limits
    for
    ongoing
    precision
    and
    recovery
    in
    Table
    17.1.
    If the
    concentration
    is
    in the
    range
    specified,
    the
    analytical
    processes
    are
    in control
    and
    the
    analysis
    of
    8

    samples
    are
    acceptable.
    If,
    however,
    the concentration
    is not
    in
    the
    specified
    range,
    the
    analytical
    process
    is not
    in control.
    In this
    event,
    correct
    the
    problem,
    re-extract
    the
    analytical
    batch,
    and
    reevaluate
    the
    ongoing
    precision
    and
    recovery
    sample
    for
    acceptability.
    9.6.3
    The
    laboratory
    should add
    results
    that pass
    the specification
    in
    Section
    9.6.2 to
    IPR
    and
    previous
    OPR
    data
    and update
    QC
    charts to
    form
    a
    graphic
    representation
    of
    continued
    laboratory
    performance.
    The
    laboratory
    should
    also
    develop
    a statement
    of laboratory
    data
    quality
    for each
    analyte
    by calculating
    the
    average
    percent
    recovery
    (R) and
    the
    standard
    deviation
    of
    the
    percent
    recovery
    (Sr).
    Express
    the
    accuracy
    as a recovery
    interval
    from R
    2
    Sr
    to R
    +
    2
    Sr.
    For example,
    if
    R =
    95 % and
    Sr
    = 5 %,
    the
    accuracy
    is
    85
    % to
    105
    %.
    9.7
    The
    specifications
    contained
    in
    this
    method
    can
    be
    met if the
    apparatus
    used
    is scrupulously
    cleaned
    and
    dedicated
    for
    the
    determination
    of
    Ra-226
    and
    Ra-228.
    The standards
    used
    for
    initial
    precision
    and
    recovery
    (IPR,
    Section
    9.2.2),
    matrix
    spikes
    (MS/MSD,
    Section
    9.3),
    and
    ongoing
    precision
    and
    recovery
    (OPR,
    Section
    9.6)
    should
    be identical,
    so
    that the
    most
    precise
    results
    will
    be
    obtained.
    However,
    they
    musty
    not
    be
    from
    the same
    source
    used for
    calibration
    standards.
    9.8
    Depending
    upon
    specific
    program
    requirements,
    field
    replicates
    and field
    spikes
    of the
    analytes
    of interest
    into
    samples
    may
    be
    required
    to
    assess the
    precision
    and accuracy
    of the
    sampling
    and sample
    transporting
    techniques.
    10.0
    Calibration
    and
    Standardization
    10.1
    Analytical
    balance
    calibration
    10.1.1
    The analytical
    balance
    must
    be calibrated
    annually
    using NIST
    —traceable
    weights.
    10.1.2
    Prior
    to
    use for
    this
    method
    the
    calibration
    for the
    balance
    must
    be checked
    with
    1mg
    and
    1000
    mg weights
    from
    a Class
    S
    set.
    10.1.3
    Calibration
    shall
    be
    within±
    10%
    (i.e.
    ±0.1
    mg) at 1
    mg and
    ± 0.5
    %(i.e.
    ±5mg) at
    1000
    mg. If values
    are
    not within
    these
    limits,
    recalibrate
    the
    balance.
    10.2
    Carrier
    standardization
    10.2.1
    In
    triplicate
    in a 100
    mL beaker
    to 20
    mL DI
    H
    20
    pipet
    5
    mL of
    barium
    carrier.
    AddS
    drops
    of concentrated
    HC1.
    If the laboratory
    prefers
    to use
    a
    lead
    carrier,
    substitute
    10
    ml
    of
    lead
    carrier
    in place
    of the
    barium
    carrier.
    10.2.2
    Heat
    to boiling
    and
    add 20 mL
    18
    N
    H
    2
    S0
    4
    with stirring.
    10.2.3
    Digest
    5—10
    minutes
    and then
    let solution
    cool.
    10.2.4
    Slurry precipitate
    and transfer
    to a 100
    mL centrifuge
    tube
    using
    0.1
    N
    H
    2
    S0
    4
    as a
    wash.
    10.2.5
    Wash
    precipitate
    twice
    with
    10 mL 0.1
    N
    H
    2
    S0
    4
    and
    discard
    washes.
    10.2.6
    Transfer
    precipitate
    to
    a
    preweighed
    sintered
    glass crucible
    and
    dry
    at 110°C
    for
    two
    hours.
    10.2.7
    Place
    in
    desiccator
    to cool.
    10.2.8
    Weigh,
    Record
    gross and
    net weight
    for
    use
    in
    calculating
    barium
    (or
    lead)
    weight per
    mL.
    10.3
    Gamma-ray
    Detector
    Calibration
    10.3.1
    Laboratories
    may
    choose
    to follow
    the energy
    and efficiency
    calibration
    procedures
    for
    gamma-ray
    detectors
    as described
    in
    EPA
    method
    901.1.
    Provisions
    must
    be made
    to
    ensure
    calculations
    in data reduction
    spreadsheets
    and software
    are able
    to adjust
    sample
    measurements
    for
    systematic
    interferences
    to
    gamma-ray
    measurements.
    Specifically
    software
    must
    correct
    for
    the
    summation
    effect
    observed
    for
    the
    609
    keV photopeak
    from
    Bi-2 14.
    If not,
    then
    the
    following
    steps
    must
    be followed
    to
    calibrate
    the gamma-ray
    detector
    for energy
    and
    efficiency.
    I
    0.3.2
    Energy
    Calibration
    9

    10.3.2.1
    Follow
    the
    instrument
    manufacturer’s
    instructions
    for
    powering
    up and
    adjusting
    the
    electronics
    of
    the
    gamma-ray
    detector
    system.
    A
    gamma-ray
    spectral
    window
    extending
    to
    a minimum
    of 2000
    keV
    is required
    for this
    method.
    10.3.2.2
    Obtain
    and
    measure
    a NIST-traceable
    source
    that
    contains
    a
    minimum
    of
    6
    photopeaks
    that extend
    throughout
    the spectral
    range
    selected
    for
    use
    by
    the
    laboratory.
    Since
    the
    energy
    response
    for
    gamma-ray
    detectors
    is
    not
    affected
    by
    geometry,
    this
    energy
    calibration
    source
    need
    not
    be in
    the
    same
    geometry
    used
    for sample
    measurements.
    Count
    time used
    for
    energy
    calibrations
    only
    need
    to be
    long
    enough
    so
    the
    lowest
    activity
    peaks
    used
    for
    calibration
    are
    distinct
    and well
    defmed
    from
    the
    Compton
    background.
    10.3.2.3
    From
    the acquired
    spectra,
    determine
    the
    channel
    number
    where
    the
    maximum
    (i.e.
    the
    peak
    centroid)
    for
    each
    peak
    occurs
    either
    by
    manual
    inspection
    and
    calculation,
    or
    manufacturer
    supplied
    data
    reduction
    software.
    Record
    each peak
    centroid
    and
    channel
    number
    pair.
    10.3.2.4
    Using
    a
    calculation
    spreadsheet
    or manufacturer
    supplied
    software,
    determine
    the
    relationship
    for
    the
    peak energy/centroid
    pairs
    by plotting
    them
    or fitting
    a mathematical
    formula
    to
    them.
    10.3.3
    Efficiency Calibration
    with
    a prepared
    efficiency
    source.
    Measuring
    a
    source
    prepared
    in
    the
    same
    way
    as the
    samples
    and
    measured
    in
    the
    same
    geometrical
    orientation
    distance
    from
    the
    detector
    as the
    samples
    produce
    the
    most
    accurate
    measurement
    of
    the
    efficiency
    for the
    peaks
    originating
    from
    the
    Ra-226
    and
    Ra-228
    progeny.
    10.3.4
    Efficiency
    calibration
    source
    preparation.
    10.3.4.1
    Obtain
    NIST
    traceable
    solutions
    of
    Ra-226
    and
    Ra-228.
    10.3.4.2
    Pipet
    5 mL
    of
    barium
    carrier
    into
    a small
    beaker,
    then
    add
    5 drops
    of
    concentrated
    HC1
    and
    20
    mL
    of deionized
    water.
    10.3.4.3
    Add
    appropriate
    amounts
    of NIST
    traceable
    solutions
    of
    Ra-226
    and
    Ra-228
    with
    a calibrated
    autopipette
    or glassware
    so
    that source
    count
    times
    will
    be
    no
    longer
    than
    the count
    times
    for
    samples,
    but
    not
    so high
    that
    instrument
    dead time
    will
    exceed
    5 percent.
    Calculate
    the decays
    per
    minute
    for each
    radioanalyte.
    10.3.4.4
    Heat
    the
    contents
    of the
    beaker
    to boiling,
    then add
    20
    mL
    18
    N
    H
    2
    S0
    4
    while
    stirring
    the
    contents
    of the
    beaker.
    10.3.4.5
    Digest
    5-
    10
    minutes
    and
    then
    let solution
    cool.
    10.3.4.6
    Slurry
    precipitate
    and transfer
    to
    a
    centrifuge
    tube
    using
    0.1
    N
    H
    2
    S0
    4
    asa
    wash.
    10.3.4.7
    Wash
    precipitate
    twice
    with
    10
    mL
    0.1 N
    H
    2
    S0
    4
    .
    Centrifuge
    between
    washes
    and discard
    the
    washes.
    10.3.4.8
    Obtain
    a
    filter of
    the same
    type
    and
    size
    to fit inside
    the
    sample
    containers
    selected
    for
    use
    to
    make
    sample
    measurements.
    Tare
    the
    filter
    by
    weighing
    it
    to an
    accuracy
    of
    0.01
    mg.
    10.3.4.9
    Place
    the
    filter
    in
    an
    appropriate
    sized filtering
    funnel
    mounted
    on
    a
    vacuum
    manifold.
    10.3.4.10
    Filter
    with
    suction
    through
    the tared
    filter.
    Quantitatively
    transfer
    precipitate
    to the
    filter
    by
    rinsing
    the remaining
    particles
    from
    the
    beaker
    with
    ajet
    of
    reagent
    water.
    10.3.4.11
    Dry
    the precipitate
    on
    the filter
    with
    10
    mL
    ethanol,
    followed
    by
    10 mL
    10

    diethyl
    ether.
    10.3.4.12
    Weigh
    filter
    and precipitate
    to determine
    yield.
    10.3.4.13
    Place
    filter
    in
    the
    same
    type
    of sample
    container
    that
    will
    be
    used
    for
    samples.
    10.3.4.14
    Hold
    for
    a
    minimum
    of 4
    weeks
    so the
    radium
    progeny
    can
    approach
    full
    ingrowth
    prior
    to gamma-ray
    spectral
    analysis
    with
    a germanium
    detector.
    10.3.5
    Efficiency
    Source
    Measurement
    10.3.5.1
    This
    calibration
    is performed
    with
    the
    same counting
    geometry
    as
    the
    samples.
    After
    ingrowth,
    place
    the
    prepared
    efficiency
    source
    into
    the
    sample
    cave
    in the
    same
    orientation
    and
    distance
    from
    the
    germanium
    detector
    as
    will be
    used
    for sample
    measurement.
    10.3.5.2
    Count
    the
    efficiency
    source
    for
    a long
    enough
    count
    time
    so
    that
    the peaks
    selected
    to
    use for
    sample
    measurements
    (the
    338,
    352,
    609
    and
    911
    keV
    photopeaks)
    will have
    accumulated
    at
    least
    10,000
    net
    counts
    above
    the
    Compton
    background.
    10.3.5.3
    After
    the
    measurement
    count
    time
    is complete,
    obtain
    the
    net
    counts
    for
    the
    peaks
    referenced
    in the
    previous
    step using
    commercially
    available
    gamma-ray
    data analysis
    software
    or a calculation
    spreadsheet.
    10.3.5.4
    Calculate
    the
    efficiency
    (6)
    individually
    for each
    photopeak
    using
    the
    following
    calculation;
    C
    DxTxRxF
    where:
    C
    = Net
    counts
    D
    =
    Calibrated
    decays
    per
    minute
    (DPM)
    for
    the
    photopeak
    from
    step
    10.3.3.1.3.
    R
    = Fractional
    chemical
    yield
    of
    barium
    carrier
    from
    step
    10.3.1.12.
    T
    = Count
    time
    (in
    minutes)
    F =
    Fractional
    intensity
    of
    the
    photopeak
    10.4
    Detector
    Background
    Characterization.
    The laboratory
    must
    determine
    the
    background
    activity
    that
    occurs
    in
    the
    regions
    of interest
    for
    each
    photopeak
    used
    to
    measure
    the
    radium
    isotopes
    in
    each gamma-ray
    detector
    used
    to
    make
    measurements
    for
    the
    method
    before
    it can
    be
    implemented
    on
    a
    routine
    basis.
    10.4.1
    Place
    a sample
    container
    containing
    a
    clean
    filter
    of
    the
    same
    type
    and
    size
    that
    will
    be
    used
    for
    sample
    measurements
    into
    the
    gamma-ray
    detector
    cave.
    Ensure
    it
    is in the
    same
    orientation
    and
    distance
    from
    the
    detector
    as
    will
    be used
    for
    sample
    measurements.
    10.4.2
    Measure
    the
    sample
    container
    and
    filter for
    a sufficiently
    long count
    time
    to
    determine
    if
    there
    is any
    activity
    in
    the regions
    of interest
    for
    the photopeaks
    used
    to measure
    the
    radium
    isotopes.
    A
    minimum
    count
    time
    of 36000
    seconds
    is recommended.
    10.4.3
    Examine
    the
    regions
    of interest
    used
    for
    the radium
    measurements
    to
    see
    if
    there
    is
    a net
    activity
    noted
    in
    them.
    If
    net
    activities
    are noted,
    use them
    in
    Step
    11.2
    in the
    next
    section
    to
    determine
    if they
    are
    sufficiently low
    so that
    reasonable
    count
    times
    and
    sample
    volumes
    can
    be
    used
    to reach
    the
    required
    sensitivities
    for
    each
    radium
    isotope
    measured
    with
    this
    method.
    10.4.4
    If
    the background
    is determined
    to
    be excessive,
    see
    if this
    background
    can
    be
    reduced
    by
    cleaning
    the interior
    of
    the
    gamma-ray
    detector
    cave,
    removing
    samples
    from
    the
    count
    room,
    venting
    the
    liquid
    nitrogen
    exhaust
    into
    the
    sample
    cave
    to displace
    any
    radon
    present,
    or
    adding
    additional
    shielding
    to
    the
    gamma-ray
    detector
    cave,
    then
    repeat
    steps 10.4.1
    though
    10.4.3
    10.4.5
    If
    the
    background
    is determined
    not to
    be
    excessive,
    store
    the
    background
    measurement
    11

    electronically
    for later
    use
    in
    data
    reduction.
    10.4.6
    At least
    monthly,
    repeat
    steps
    10.4.1
    through
    10.4.5
    and record
    the
    activities
    for each
    region
    of
    interest
    used
    to
    measure
    the
    radium
    isotopes.
    The
    laboratory
    should
    then
    control
    chart
    the
    results
    and
    set
    control
    limits
    for the
    backgrounds
    in
    each region
    of interest
    to
    ensure
    their
    background
    activities
    remain
    in
    control
    for sample
    measurements.
    11.0
    Procedure
    This
    method
    is
    entirely
    empirical.
    Precise
    and
    accurate
    results
    can
    be
    obtained
    only
    by
    strict
    adherence
    to
    all
    details.
    Note:
    The
    procedure
    below
    is
    based
    on the
    preparation,
    precipitation,
    and
    analysis
    ofa 2
    L sample
    volume
    and
    a
    nominal
    40
    % efficiency
    high
    purity
    germanium
    detector.
    If
    a
    dfferent
    detector
    is used
    for analysis,
    the
    laboratory
    may
    need
    to adjust
    the
    volume
    ofsample
    and counting
    time
    required
    to
    reach
    the
    desired
    detection
    limit.
    11.1
    Determine
    the sample
    volume,
    ingrowth
    period
    and count
    time
    required
    to
    meet
    the required
    detection
    limits.
    11.1.1
    The sensitivity
    of
    these
    measurements
    must
    comply
    with
    the
    required
    detection
    limits
    for
    these
    radioanalytes
    specified
    at
    40 CFR
    part
    141.25(c),
    Table
    1
    as 1
    pCiIL
    for
    both
    radium
    isotopes.
    11.1.2
    A
    minimum
    ingrowth
    period
    of
    14 days
    is recommended
    for
    Ra-226
    measurements.
    11.2
    Radium
    purification.
    11.2.1
    Measure
    the
    volume
    of
    preserved
    drinking
    water
    sample
    (Note
    1), determined
    in
    step
    11.1
    in
    a
    volumetric
    flask
    or
    graduated
    cylinder,
    then
    pour
    the
    measured
    volume
    into
    a borosilicate
    beaker
    large
    enough
    to
    contain
    it.
    11.2.2
    Add
    10 mL
    of 12
    N hydrochloric
    acid
    for
    every
    liter
    of sample
    used
    and
    stir.
    11.2.3
    Using
    a
    volumetric
    pipet
    add
    5.0
    mL barium
    carrier
    (9
    mg/mL).
    If the lead
    carrier
    is
    being
    used
    instead,
    add
    10.0
    mL
    lead
    carrier
    (20
    mg/mL)
    in
    place
    of
    the
    barium
    carrier.
    11.2.4
    Stir
    and
    heat
    to
    boiling.
    11.2.5
    Precipitate
    barium
    sulfate
    by
    adding
    10
    mL
    of
    18
    N
    H
    2
    S0
    4
    for
    every
    liter
    of sample
    used,
    stirring
    frequently.
    Boil
    for
    30
    mm.
    11.2.6
    Store
    overnight
    to let
    the precipitate
    settle,
    or
    for fast
    settling
    cool
    30
    mm
    in
    an
    ice
    bath.
    11.2.1
    Obtain
    a
    filter
    of
    the
    size
    appropriate
    for
    the
    filtering
    funnel
    (Note
    2) used
    at
    the
    laboratory.
    Tare
    the
    filter
    by
    weighing
    it
    to
    the nearest
    0.01
    mg.
    11.2.8
    Place
    the tared
    filter
    into
    a filter
    funnel
    that
    is attached
    to a
    vacuum
    manifold
    or
    to a
    vacuum
    flask
    that
    is connected
    to a
    vacuum
    source.
    11.2.9
    Filter
    with suction
    through
    the
    tared filter.
    Quantitatively
    transfer
    precipitate
    to
    the filter
    by
    rinsing
    the remaining
    particles
    from
    the
    beaker
    with
    a
    jet
    of
    water.
    11.2.10
    Dry
    the
    precipitate
    on the
    filter
    with
    10 mL
    ethanol,
    followed
    by 10
    mL
    diethyl
    ether.
    11.2.11
    Weigh
    filter
    and
    precipitate.
    Record
    the
    weight.
    11.2.12
    Subtract
    the
    tared
    filter
    weight
    from
    the
    combined
    weight
    of
    the
    filter
    and
    precipitate
    to
    determine
    the net
    weight
    of
    the precipitate.
    Divide
    this
    net
    weight
    of
    the
    precipitate
    by
    the
    maximum theoretical
    weight
    of
    the
    precipitate
    based
    on the
    amount
    of
    barium
    carrier
    that
    is
    used
    for the
    precipitation.
    The
    ratio
    is the
    Fractional
    Chemical
    Yield
    (Y)
    for
    the
    sample
    precipitation.
    11.2.13
    Place
    the filter
    in
    the same
    type
    of sample
    container
    as the
    efficiency
    calibration
    standard.
    11.2.14
    Repeat
    steps
    11.2.1
    for
    each
    sample
    in the
    preparation
    batch.
    12

    11.2.15
    Hold
    the
    prepared
    samples
    for
    Ra-226
    progeny
    ingrowth
    before
    proceeding
    to
    the
    next
    step.
    If
    only
    Ra-228
    measurements
    are to
    be
    made
    for
    the
    prepared
    samples,
    then
    proceed
    directly
    to
    the
    next
    step.
    Calculate the ingrowth
    by
    the
    following
    equation:
    Ra-226
    progeny
    ingrowth
    =
    I —
    e’
    Where;
    t is time
    in days
    and
    2
    is ln(2)
    divided
    by the
    half-life
    in days
    of
    3.825
    =
    0.18112
    d’
    (or
    one
    can interpolate
    from
    Table
    17.3)
    Note
    1:
    At the
    time
    of
    sample
    collection,
    add
    4 mL
    16
    N
    HNO
    3
    for
    each
    gallon
    (3.7 L)
    of
    water.
    Note
    2: A
    47mm
    filter
    is
    used
    with
    a
    steel
    planchet
    or
    plastic
    Petri
    dish
    (step
    11.1.8)
    but
    other
    filters
    can
    be
    substituted,
    subject
    to
    step
    11.2.1,
    such
    as
    a
    25 mm
    filter
    for
    placement
    in
    ring
    and
    disk
    or filters
    of
    various
    sizes
    for
    placement
    in vial
    to be
    counted
    in
    well
    type
    detector.
    11.3
    Sample
    Measurement
    11.3.1
    Place
    the
    sample
    container
    and
    filter
    assembly
    in
    the
    same
    geometry
    as
    was
    used
    for measuring
    the
    efficiency source
    in
    step
    10.3.5.
    Collect
    the gamma-ray
    spectra
    for
    the
    count
    time
    determined in
    step
    11.1.
    11.3.2
    Use
    either
    manufacturer
    supplied
    software
    or
    a
    calculation
    spreadsheet
    to determine
    the
    net
    activity
    in
    the
    regions
    of
    interest
    for
    each
    photopeak
    used
    to measure
    the
    radium
    isotopes.
    Ensure
    it
    will:
    11.3.2.1
    Subtract
    the
    Compton
    background
    under
    each
    peak
    properly.
    11.3.2.2
    Subtract
    the
    net
    background
    adjusted
    for
    the
    sample
    count
    time
    for
    each
    region
    of
    interest.
    To adjust
    the
    background
    measured
    for
    each
    region
    of
    interest
    used
    to
    measure
    the
    radium
    isotopes,
    multiply
    each
    region’s
    count
    rate
    (cpm)
    obtained
    from
    the background
    measurement
    by the
    number
    of
    minutes
    the
    sample
    was
    counted.
    The
    software
    or
    calculation
    spreadsheet
    must
    then
    subtract
    this net
    background
    activity
    from
    the
    net
    counts
    in
    each
    photopeak’s
    region
    of
    interest
    that
    is above
    the
    Compton
    background
    in
    the sample
    spectra
    to
    obtain
    the
    final
    net
    counts
    used
    in
    calculating
    the
    activity
    and
    uncertainty
    for
    the
    samples.
    12.0
    Data
    Analysis
    and
    Calculations
    12.1
    Sample
    activity
    concentration,
    the
    combined
    standard
    uncertainty
    of
    measurements
    of
    sample
    activity
    concentration
    made
    using
    this
    method,
    and
    method
    sensitivity
    are
    determined
    using
    the
    equations
    given
    below.
    12.2
    Calculate
    the
    concentration,
    As
    of
    Ra-228
    and
    Ra-226
    in picocuries
    per
    liter
    (pCi/L)
    as follows:
    Assumptions:
    The
    detector
    is
    calibrated
    with
    a prepared
    radium
    source,
    not
    a
    mixed-gamma
    source.
    There
    is
    negligible
    uncertainty
    associated
    with
    the
    calibration.
    The
    uncertainties
    of
    times,
    volumes,
    and
    masses
    are
    negligible.
    There
    is negligible
    variability
    in
    replicate
    determinations
    of
    the
    carrier
    mass.
    There
    is
    negligible
    variability
    in
    the
    ratio
    of
    the
    radium
    and
    barium
    recoveries.
    Given
    these
    assumptions,
    the
    only
    significant
    sources
    of
    uncertainty
    are
    counting
    statistics
    and
    the
    determination
    of
    net
    photopeak
    areas
    in
    the gamma-ray
    spectrum.
    13

    For both
    Ra-228
    and
    Ra-226, the
    activity
    equation
    can
    be written
    as
    R
    R
    W
    1
    __L+...+W__
    fl
    (4)
    2.22xV
    xYSxDS
    where
    As
    is
    the sample
    activity concentration
    (pCIJL)
    n
    is
    the
    number
    of peaks used
    (typically
    n = 2)
    R
    1
    (for
    I
    = 1, 2,
    ..., n) is the net
    count
    rate
    in counts
    per minute
    (min
    1
    )
    for
    peak i,
    corrected
    for
    baseline,
    background,
    and
    interferences
    V
    is the
    volume of the
    sample aliquant
    analyzed
    (L)
    Ys
    is the
    chemical yield,
    or recovery,
    for the
    sample (fraction)
    Ds
    is the
    correction
    factor
    for decay/ingrowth
    (fraction)
    is
    the detection
    efficiency
    for peak
    i
    (fraction)
    F
    1
    is the branching
    fraction
    for
    peak
    i
    (fraction)
    W
    1
    is the weighting
    factor for
    peak
    I
    (fraction);
    W
    1 + W2 +
    + W,,
    = 1; e.g.,
    W
    1 might
    be
    I(6
    1
    P+•.•+8F)
    Other unit
    conversions
    can
    be
    handled
    by including
    a constant
    factor
    in
    the denominator
    of the
    expression
    for
    A
    5
    .
    12.4
    The
    equation
    for
    the
    combined
    standard
    uncertainty
    ofAs
    is shown
    below.
    1
    W2
    u2
    (R
    1
    )
    +w
    2
    u2
    (R)
    1
    62
    F
    2
    (5)
    uc(As) —
    2.22xVsxYsXDs
    The
    values and
    uncertainties
    for R
    for I
    =
    1 to n, should
    be
    provided
    by
    the gamma-analysis
    software.
    Note
    that
    the
    uncertainties
    of
    Vs,
    Ys,
    D
    5
    ,
    and s
    are assumed
    to
    be
    negligible,
    and
    the uncertainty
    ofF
    1
    does
    not
    affect
    the
    combined
    standard
    uncertainty
    ofAs
    when a radium
    source
    is used
    for efficiency
    calibration
    at each
    of the
    gamma-
    ray
    energies.
    Any additional
    uncertainties
    for
    Vs.
    Ys,
    Ds,
    or
    for the calibration
    standard
    or the
    yield obtained
    during
    the
    calibration
    can be
    included by
    adding
    terms to
    u
    (As)
    that
    look like:
    2
    u2
    (Some
    quantity)
    As
    (Some
    quantity)
    12.5
    Method Sensitivity
    Since
    this
    method
    utilizes
    multiple
    photopeaks
    for quantitation,
    the sensitivity
    depends
    on
    the Compton
    baseline
    and
    on
    the
    background
    activity
    for each photopeak
    above
    the baseline.
    When
    Equation
    4
    is used
    for the activity
    concentration
    of a
    sample, the
    following
    equation
    may be
    used to estimate
    the
    SDWA
    detection
    limit:
    DL=’
    96
    -—1+
    1
    (6)
    2t
    5
    =i
    2.22
    x
    V
    x
    x
    D5
    14

    where:
    DL
    is the
    SDWA
    detection
    limit,
    in
    picocuries
    per
    liter
    (pCi/L)
    is the
    sample
    count
    time
    (mm)
    V(RI)R_o
    is
    the variance
    of
    the
    observed
    net
    count
    rate,
    R,,
    when
    the sample
    activity
    is zero
    Each
    variance
    V(RI)R_o
    may
    be
    estimated
    as
    follows:
    V(R
    )R, 0
    = Cscompi
    +
    (CBI
    — CB
    Comp,)
    X
    t
    /
    t
    +
    u2
    (Cscompi)
    +
    CB,
    +
    U
    (CBC
    0
    mp1)
    (7)
    tB
    where:
    C,omp,j
    is the
    number
    of
    counts
    in
    sample
    peak i
    due to
    the
    Compton
    baseline
    of the
    sample
    spectrum
    U(Cs,comp,i)
    is
    the standard
    uncertainty
    of the
    estimated
    number
    of counts
    in sample
    peak
    i due
    to
    the
    Compton
    baseline
    (depends
    on
    the model
    used
    to
    estimate
    the
    baseline
    under
    the
    peak)
    CB,I
    is
    the total
    count
    in the
    background
    peak
    (if
    any)
    for
    peak
    1, before
    correction
    for
    the
    Compton
    baseline
    of the
    background
    spectrum
    CB,Comp,i
    is
    the number
    of
    counts
    in
    the
    background
    peak
    (if
    any)
    for sample
    peak
    i due
    to
    the
    Compton
    baseline
    of the
    background
    spectrum
    U(CB,Comp,i)
    is
    the standard
    uncertainty
    of the
    estimated
    number
    of counts
    in
    the
    background
    peak
    for
    sample
    peak
    i due
    to the
    Compton
    baseline
    the
    sample
    count
    time
    (mm)
    tB
    is
    the
    background
    count
    time (mm)
    Note:
    If there
    is
    no background
    peak,
    omit
    the
    background
    terms
    in the
    equation
    above.
    13.0
    Method Performance
    This
    method
    was
    validated
    through
    an
    inter-laboratory
    method
    validation
    study.
    There
    were
    9 method
    ruggedness samples
    with
    known
    concentrations
    in these
    studies
    (n
    =
    9).
    Table
    13.1
    below
    demonstrates
    the
    method
    has
    comparable
    or better
    performance
    when
    compared
    to EPA
    approved
    methods
    to measure
    these
    radioanalytes
    in
    drinking
    water.
    Table
    13.1.
    The
    accuracy
    and
    precision
    results
    derived
    from
    matrix
    spike
    and duplicated
    samples
    in
    the
    method
    ruggedness
    studies
    Percent
    Percent
    Ra226
    Recovery
    RPD
    Ra228
    Recovery
    RPD
    Avg
    99
    7
    101
    6
    Std.Dev.
    7
    6
    9
    6
    Limit
    19
    18
    Lower
    Limit
    85
    83
    Upper
    Limit
    113
    119
    15

    One
    laboratory
    also conducted
    a study
    to document
    the equivalency
    of using lead
    as the carrier
    instead
    of
    barium.
    Table 13.2
    below demonstrates
    the accuracy
    and
    precision
    for the
    10
    samples
    that were
    spiked
    with
    known
    amounts
    of
    the radioanalytes
    of
    interest.
    Table
    13.2. The accuracy
    and
    precision
    results derived
    from the
    matrix
    spike and duplicated
    samples
    in
    the
    lead
    carrier
    equivalency
    study.
    Percent
    Percent
    Ra226
    Recovery
    RPD
    Ra228
    Recovery
    RPD
    Average
    102
    4
    95
    6
    Std.Dev.
    2
    2
    3
    2
    140
    Pollution
    Prevention
    14.1
    The solvents
    used
    in
    this
    method pose
    little
    threat
    to the
    environment
    when
    recycled
    and
    managed
    properly.
    14.2
    Standards
    should
    be
    prepared in
    volumes
    consistent
    with laboratory
    use
    to
    minimize
    the volume
    of
    expired
    standards
    to be disposed.
    15.0
    Waste
    Management
    15.1
    It is the
    laboratory’s
    responsibility
    to comply
    with
    all federal,
    state,
    and local
    regulations
    governing
    waste
    management,
    particularly
    the hazardous
    waste
    identification
    rules
    and land disposal
    restrictions,
    and to
    protect the
    air, water, and
    land
    by
    minimizing
    and
    controlling
    all releases
    from
    fume
    hoods
    and
    bench
    operations.
    Compliance
    with all sewage
    discharge
    permits
    and regulations
    is also required.
    15.2
    Samples
    preserved
    with HC1 or
    H
    2
    SO
    4
    to pH
    <2
    are
    hazardous
    and must
    be
    neutralized
    before
    being
    disposed,
    or must
    be
    handled
    as hazardous
    waste.
    15.3
    For further
    information
    on waste
    management,
    consult
    “The Waste
    Management
    Manual
    for
    Laboratory
    Personnel”,
    and
    “Less
    is Better:
    Laboratory
    Chemical
    Management
    for Waste
    Reduction”,
    both
    available
    from the
    American
    Chemical
    Society’s
    Department
    of Government
    Relations
    and Science
    Policy,
    1155
    16th
    Street N.W.,
    Washington,
    D.C. 20036.
    15.4
    Use of this
    method may
    result in
    the generation
    of
    mixed waste
    (MW).
    MW contains
    both
    hazardous
    waste
    (as defined
    by RCRA
    and its
    amendments)
    and
    radioactive waste
    (as
    defined by
    AEA and its
    amendments).
    It is
    jointly
    regulated
    by NRC
    or NRC’s
    Agreement
    States
    and
    EPA or
    EPA’s RCRA
    Authorized
    States.
    The
    fundamental
    and
    most
    comprehensive
    statutory
    definition
    is found
    in the
    Federal
    Facilities
    Compliance
    Act
    (FFCA)
    where
    Section
    1004(41) was
    added
    to
    RCRA:
    “The term ‘mixed
    waste’
    means
    waste
    that
    contains
    both
    hazardous
    waste and
    source,
    special
    nuclear,
    or byproduct
    material
    subject
    to
    the
    Atomic
    Energy
    Act
    of
    1954.” For more
    information
    on the handling
    and
    treatment
    of MW, please
    see
    http://www.epa.gov/radiation/mixed-waste/
    16

    16.0
    References
    16.1
    “Methods
    for
    Chemical
    Analysis
    of
    Water
    and
    Wastes”,
    3rd
    Edition,
    Environmental
    Protection
    Agency,
    Environmental
    Monitoring
    Systems
    Laboratory-Cincinnati
    (EMSL-Ci),
    Cincinnati,
    Ohio
    45268,
    EPA-
    600/4-79-020, Method
    413.1,
    (1983).
    16.2
    “Standard
    Methods
    for
    the
    Examination
    of Water
    and
    Wastewater”,
    18th
    Edition,
    American
    Public
    Health
    Association,
    1015
    Fifteenth
    Street,
    NW,
    Washington,
    D.C.
    20005,
    Method
    5520B
    and Method
    5520F,
    (1992).
    16.3
    40
    CFR
    136,
    Appendix
    A,
    Methods
    1624 and
    1625.
    16.4
    “Carcinogens
    - Working
    With
    Carcinogens,”
    Department
    of
    Health,
    Education,
    and
    Welfare,
    Public
    Health
    Service,
    Center
    for
    Disease
    Control,
    National
    Institute
    for
    Occupational
    Safety
    and
    Health,
    Publication
    No.
    77-206,
    August
    1977.
    16.5
    “OSHA
    Safety
    and
    Health
    Standards,
    General
    Industry,”
    (29
    CFR
    1910),
    Occupational
    Safety
    and
    Health
    Administration,
    OSHA
    2206
    (Revised,
    January
    1976).
    16.6
    “Safety
    in
    Academic
    Chemistry
    Laboratories,”
    American
    Chemical
    Society,
    Committee
    on Chemical
    Safety,
    3rd
    Edition,
    1979.
    16.7
    “Standard
    Practices
    for Sampling
    Water,”
    ASTM
    Annual
    Book
    of
    Standards,
    Part
    31,
    D3370-76,
    American
    Society
    for Testing
    and Materials,
    1916
    Race
    Street,
    Philadelphia,
    PA
    19103-1187,
    1980.
    16.8
    “Handbook
    of Analytical Quality
    Control
    in Water
    and
    Wastewater
    Laboratories,”
    USEPA,
    EMSL-Ci,
    Cincinnati,
    OH
    45268,
    EPA-600/4-79-019,
    March
    1979.
    16.9
    “Method
    Validation
    Report:
    A Method
    for
    the
    Determination
    of
    Radium-226
    and
    Radium
    228
    in
    Drinking
    Water
    by Gamma-ray Spectrometry
    Using
    HPGe
    and
    Ge(Li)
    Detectors.”
    Available
    from
    the
    Sample
    Control
    Center,
    6101
    Stevenson
    Avenue,
    Alexandria,
    VA
    22304.
    16.10
    Johnson,
    J.O.
    Determination of
    Radium-228
    in
    Natural
    Waters.
    Radiochemical
    Analysis
    of
    Water,
    Geological
    Survey
    Water
    - Supply
    Paper
    1696-G.,
    U.S.
    Govt.
    Printing
    Office,
    Washington,
    DC
    (1971).
    16.11
    Interim
    Radiochemical Methodology
    for
    Drinking
    Water:
    Report
    EPA-600/4-75-008,
    March
    1976.
    16.12
    Michel,
    3.,
    Moore,
    W.
    S.
    and
    King,
    P. T.
    (1981)
    Gamma-ray
    spectrometry
    for
    determination
    of
    228
    Ra
    and
    226
    Ra
    in
    natural
    waters.
    Anal.
    Chem.
    53,
    1885-1889.
    16.13
    King,
    P.
    T.,
    Michel,
    J. and
    Moore,
    W.
    5.
    (1982)
    Ground
    water
    geochemistry
    of
    228
    Ra,
    226
    Ra
    and
    222
    Geochimica
    et
    Cosmochimica
    Acta
    46,
    1173-1182.
    16.14
    Krishnaswami,
    S.,
    Graustein,
    W.
    C. and
    Turekian,
    K.
    K.
    (1982)
    Radium,
    thorium
    and radioactive
    lead
    isotopes
    in
    groundwaters:
    application
    to the
    in
    situ determination
    of
    adsorption-desorption
    rate
    constants
    and retardation factors.
    Water
    Resources
    Research.
    18,
    no.6,
    1663—1
    675.
    16.15
    Moore,
    W.
    S.
    (1984)
    Radium
    isotope
    measurements
    using
    germanium
    detectors.
    Nuclear
    Instruments
    and
    Methods
    in
    Physics
    Research
    223,
    407—411.
    16.16
    Kahn,
    B. (1989)
    Screening Method
    for
    Radium-228
    in Drinking
    Water,
    Assistance
    ID
    No.
    CR-813-630-01,
    submitted
    March
    1989
    to
    the EPA
    16.17
    Kahn,
    B.,
    Rosson,
    R. and
    Cantrell,
    J.
    (1989)
    Determination
    of
    radium
    in
    ground
    water
    by
    gamma-ray
    spectral
    analysis.
    Pittsburgh
    Conference
    and
    Exposition
    on Analytical
    Chemistry
    and
    Applied
    Spectroscopy abstract
    239.
    16.18
    Kahn,
    B.,
    Rosson,
    R. and
    Cantrell,
    3.
    (1990)
    Analysis
    of
    228
    Ra
    and
    226
    Ra
    in public
    water
    supplies
    by
    a y-ray
    spectrometer. Health
    Physics.
    59, 125—13
    1.
    16.19
    American
    Society
    for
    Testing
    and
    Materials
    (ASTM).
    1994.
    Standard
    Specification
    for
    Laboratory
    Glass
    Volumetric Flasks,
    E 288.
    ASTM,
    West
    Conshohocken,
    PA.
    16.20
    American
    Society
    for
    Testing
    and
    Materials
    (ASTM).
    1995.
    Standard
    Specification
    for
    Glass
    Volumetric
    (Transfer)
    Pipets,
    E 969.
    ASTM,
    West Conshohocken,
    PA.
    17

    16.21
    Reyss,
    J. L.,
    Schmidt,
    S.,
    Legeleux,
    F.
    and
    Bonte,
    P.
    (1995)
    Large
    low
    background
    well-type
    detectors
    for
    measurements
    of
    environmental
    radioactivity.
    Nuclear
    Instruments
    and
    Methods
    in
    Physics
    Research
    357,
    39
    1—397.
    16.22
    Schmidt,
    S.
    and Reyss,
    J.
    L.,
    (1996)
    Radium
    as internal
    tracer
    of Mediterranean
    outflow
    water.
    Journal
    of
    Geophysical
    Research,
    101,
    no. C2,
    3589-3596.
    16.23
    Hakam,
    0. K.,
    Choukri,
    A., Moutia,
    Z., Chouak,
    A., Cherkaoui,
    R.,
    Reyss,
    J.L.
    and
    Lferde,
    M. (2000)
    Activities
    and
    activity
    ratios
    of
    U and
    Ra
    radioisotopes
    in drinking
    water
    wells,
    springs
    and
    tap
    water
    samples
    in
    Morocco.
    Radiochim.
    Acta
    88,
    55-60.
    16.24
    American Society
    for
    Testing
    and Materials
    (ASTM).
    2000.
    Standard
    Practice
    for
    Calibration
    of
    Laboratory
    Volumetric Glassware,
    E 542.
    ASTM,
    West
    Conshohocken,
    PA.
    16.25
    Luo,
    S.,
    Ku,
    T.,
    Roback,
    R.,
    Murrell,
    M.
    and
    McLing
    T. L.
    (2000)
    In-situ
    radionuclide
    transport
    and
    preferential
    groundwater flows
    at
    1NEEL
    (Idaho):
    decay-series
    disequilibrium
    studies.
    Geochimica
    et
    Cosmochimica
    Acta
    64, 867—881.
    16.26
    Hakam,
    0. K.,
    Choukri,
    A., Moutia,
    Z., Chouak,
    A., Cherkaoui,
    R.,
    Reyss,
    J.L.
    and
    Lferde,
    M.
    (2001)
    Uranium
    and
    radium
    in
    groundwater
    and
    surface
    water
    samples
    in
    Morocco.
    Radiation
    Physics
    and
    Chemistry
    61,
    653—654.
    16.27
    Rosson,
    R.,
    Kahn,
    B., Lahr,
    J. and
    Crowe,
    D.
    (2001)
    Measurement
    of
    228
    Ra
    and
    226
    Ra
    by
    y-ray
    spectrometer
    in drinking
    water
    (abstract).
    47
    th
    Annual
    Radiochemical
    Measurements
    Conference.
    16.28
    7500-Ra224
    E.
    Gamma-ray
    spectroscopy
    method.
    (submitted)
    Standard
    Methods
    for the
    Examination
    of
    Water
    and
    Wastewater
    (
    21
    st
    Edition
    ).
    Published
    by
    the American
    Public
    Health
    Association,
    the
    American
    Water
    Works
    Association
    and the
    Water
    Environment
    Federation
    16.29
    American
    Society
    for
    Testing
    and
    Materials
    (ASTM).
    1999.
    Standard
    Specification
    for
    Reagent
    Water,
    Dl
    193-99.
    ASTM,
    West
    Conshohocken,
    PA
    18

    17.0
    Tables
    Table
    17.1.
    Acceptance
    Criteria
    for
    Performance
    Tests
    Acceptance
    Criterion
    Section
    Limit
    (%)
    Initial
    precision
    and
    recovery
    9.2.2
    Ra-226
    Precision
    (s)
    9.2.2.2
    12
    Ra-226
    Recovery
    (X)
    9.2.2.2
    76—125
    Ra-228
    Precision
    (s)
    9.2.2.2
    10
    Ra-228
    Recovery
    (X)
    9.2.2.2
    77—115
    Matrix
    spike/matrix
    spike
    9.3
    duplicate
    Ra-226
    Recovery
    9.3.4
    85-113
    Ra-226
    RPD
    9.3.5
    12
    Ra-228
    Recovery
    9.3.4
    84-118
    Ra-228
    RPD
    9.3.5
    18
    Ongoing
    precision
    and
    9.6
    recovery
    Ra-226
    Recovery
    9.6
    76—125
    Ra-228
    Recovery
    9.6
    77—115
    Table
    17.2:
    Sample
    Handling,
    Preservation,
    and
    Instrumentation
    Parameter
    Preservative’
    Container
    2
    Maximum
    Holding
    Time
    3
    Radium-226
    Conc.
    HC1
    or
    HNO
    3
    to
    pH
    <2
    P or
    G
    6 mo
    Radium-228
    Conc.
    HC1
    or
    HNO
    3
    to
    pH
    <2
    P
    or
    G
    6 mo
    ‘It
    is
    recommended
    that
    the
    preservative
    be
    added
    to the
    sample
    at
    the time
    of
    collection.
    However,
    if
    the
    sample
    has
    to
    be
    shipped
    to a laboratory
    or storage
    area,
    acidification
    of
    the sample
    (in
    its original
    container)
    may
    be
    delayed
    for
    a
    period
    not
    to
    exceed
    5 days.
    A
    minimum
    of 16
    hours
    must
    elapse
    between
    acidification and analysis.
    = Plastic,
    hard
    or
    soft;
    G = Glass,
    hard
    or
    soft.
    3
    Holding
    time
    is defined
    as
    the
    period
    from
    time
    of sampling
    to
    time
    of analysis.
    In
    all
    cases,
    samples
    should
    be
    analyzed
    as soon
    after
    collection
    as
    possible.
    If a composite
    sample
    is prepared,
    a
    holding
    time
    cannot
    exceed
    12 months.
    19

    Table 17.3. Ingrowth
    Factors for Short
    —lived
    Radium-226
    Progeny
    y
    %
    Ingrowth
    % Ingrowth
    %
    Ingrowth
    Dayl
    0.165
    Day2
    0.304
    Day3
    0.419
    Day4
    0.515
    Day5
    0.595
    Day6
    0.662
    Day7
    0.718
    Day8
    0.765
    Day9
    0.804
    DaylO
    0.836
    Dayll
    0.863
    Dayl2
    0.886
    Dayl3
    0.905
    Dayl4
    0.920
    Dayl5
    0.933
    Dayl6
    0.944
    Dayl7
    0.954
    Dayl8
    0.961
    Dayl9
    0.968
    Day2O
    0.973
    Day2l
    0.977
    Day22
    0.981
    Day23
    0.984
    Day24
    0.987
    Day25
    0.989
    Day26
    0.991
    Day27
    0.992
    20

    18.0
    Glossary
    of
    Definitions
    and
    Purposes
    The definitions and
    purposes
    are
    specific
    to
    this
    method
    but have
    been
    conformed
    to
    common
    usage
    as
    much
    as possible.
    18.1
    Units
    of
    weight
    and
    measure
    and
    their
    abbreviations
    18.1.1
    Symbols
    °C
    degrees
    Celsius
    less
    than
    %
    percent
    ±
    plus
    or
    minus
    18.1.2
    Alphabetical
    characters
    g
    gram
    h
    hour
    L
    liter
    mg
    milligram
    mg/L
    milligram
    per
    liter
    mg/mL
    milligram
    per
    milliliter
    mL
    milliliter
    No.
    number
    18.2
    Definitions,
    acronyms,
    and
    abbreviations
    18.2.1
    Analyte:
    The
    Ra-226
    or
    Ra-228
    tested
    for
    by
    this
    method.
    18.2.2
    Analytical batch:
    The
    set of
    samples
    extracted
    at the
    same
    time,
    to a
    maxi
    mum
    of 10
    samples.
    Each analytical
    batch
    of
    10 or
    fewer
    samples
    must
    be
    accompanied
    by
    a laboratory
    blank
    (Section
    9.4),
    an ongoing
    precision
    and
    recovery
    sample
    (OPR,
    Section
    9.6), and
    a matrix
    spike
    and matrix
    spike
    duplicate
    (MS/MSD,
    Section
    9.3),
    resulting
    in a minimum
    of five
    analyses
    (1
    sample,
    1 blank,
    1
    OPR,
    1 MS,
    and 1
    MSD)
    and a
    maximum
    of
    14
    analyses
    (10
    samples,
    1
    blank,
    1 OPR,
    I
    MS, and
    1 MSD)
    in
    the batch.
    If greater
    than
    10 samples
    are
    to be
    extracted
    at
    one time,
    the
    samples
    must
    be separated
    into
    analytical
    batches
    of
    10
    or
    fewer
    samples.
    18.2.3
    Field
    blank:
    An
    aliquant
    of
    reagent
    water
    that
    is placed
    in a
    sample
    container
    in
    the laboratory
    or in
    the
    field
    and
    treated
    as a sample
    in all
    respects,
    including
    exposure
    to
    sampling
    site
    conditions,
    storage,
    preservation,
    and
    all
    analytical
    procedures.
    The
    purpose
    of
    the
    field
    blank
    is
    to
    determine
    if the
    field
    or
    sample
    transporting
    procedures
    and
    environments
    have
    contaminated
    the sample.
    18.2.4
    IPR.
    See initial
    precision
    and
    recovery.
    18.2.5
    Initial
    precision
    and
    recovery
    (IPR):
    Four
    aliquants
    of
    the
    diluted
    PAR
    analyzed
    to
    establish
    the ability
    to generate
    acceptable
    precision
    and
    accuracy.
    An IPR
    is performed
    the
    first
    time
    this
    method
    is used
    and
    any
    time
    the
    method
    or instrumentation
    is modified.
    18.2.6
    Laboratory
    blank
    (method
    blank):
    An aliquant
    of reagent
    water
    that
    is treated
    exactly
    as
    a sample
    including
    exposure
    to all
    glassware,
    equipment,
    solvents,
    reagents,
    internal
    standards,
    and surrogates
    that
    are
    used
    with
    samples.
    The
    laboratory
    blank
    is used
    to
    determine
    if
    analytes
    or
    interferences
    are
    present
    in
    the
    laboratory
    environment,
    the reagents,
    or
    the apparatus.
    18.2.7
    Laboratory
    control
    sample
    (LCS):
    See
    Ongoing
    precision
    and
    recovery
    stan
    dard
    (OPR).
    18.2.8
    Matrix
    spike
    (MS)
    and
    matrix
    spike
    duplicate
    (MSD):
    Aliquants
    of an
    environmental
    sample
    to
    which
    known
    quantities
    of
    the
    analytes
    are added
    in
    the
    laboratory.
    The
    MS
    and MSD
    are
    prepared
    and/or
    analyzed
    exactly
    like a
    21

    field
    sample.
    Their
    purpose
    is to
    quantif,’
    any
    additional
    bias
    and
    imprecision
    caused
    by the sample
    matrix.
    The
    background
    concentrations
    of the analytes
    in
    the sample
    matrix
    must
    be determined
    in a separate
    aliquant
    and
    the
    measured
    values
    in the
    MS and
    MSD
    corrected
    for background
    concentrations.
    18.2.9
    yj
    This
    action,
    activity,
    or procedural
    step is
    neither
    required
    nor
    prohibit
    ed.
    18.2.10
    May
    not:
    This
    action,
    activity,
    or procedural
    step
    is prohibited.
    18.2.11
    Method
    Detection
    Limit:
    The
    lowest
    level
    at
    which
    an analyte
    can be
    detected
    with
    99
    percent
    confidence
    that
    the analyte
    concentration
    is
    greater
    than zero.
    18.2.12
    Minimum
    Level
    (ML): The
    lowest
    level
    at which
    the
    entire
    analytical
    system
    gives
    a recognizable
    signal
    and
    acceptable
    calibration
    point for
    the
    analyte.
    It
    is
    equivalent
    to
    the
    concentration
    of the
    lowest
    calibration
    standard,
    assuming
    that
    all
    method-specified
    sample
    weights,
    volumes,
    and
    cleanup
    procedures
    have
    been
    employed.
    18.2.13
    Must:
    This action,
    activity,
    or
    procedural
    step
    is required.
    18.2.14
    Ongoing
    precision
    and
    recovery
    standard
    (OPR.
    also called
    a
    laboratory
    control
    sample):
    A
    laboratory
    blank
    spiked
    with
    known quantities
    of analytes.
    The
    OPR
    is analyzed
    exactly
    like
    a
    sample.
    Its purpose
    is
    to assure
    that the
    results
    produced
    by
    the
    laboratory
    remain
    within
    the
    limits specified
    in
    this
    method
    for
    precision
    and
    accuracy.
    18.2.15
    OPR: See
    Ongoing
    precision
    and
    recovery
    standard.
    18.2.16
    PAR
    See
    Precision
    and
    recovery
    standard.
    18.2.17
    Precision
    and
    recovery
    standard:
    Secondary
    standard
    that
    is
    diluted
    and spiked
    to
    form
    the
    IPR and
    OPR.
    18.2.18
    Quality
    control
    sample
    (QCS):
    A sample
    containing
    analytes
    of
    interest
    at
    known
    concentrations.
    The
    QCS
    is obtained
    from
    a source
    external
    to
    the
    laboratory
    or
    is prepared
    from
    standards
    obtained
    from
    a
    different
    source
    than
    the
    calibration
    standards.
    The
    purpose
    is to check
    laboratory
    performance
    using
    test materials
    that
    have
    been prepared
    independently
    from
    the normal
    preparation
    process.
    18.2.19
    Reagent
    water:
    Water
    demonstrated
    to
    be
    free from
    Ra-226,
    Ra-228
    and
    potentially
    interfering
    substances
    at or
    above
    the
    Minimum
    Level
    of this
    method.
    18.2.20
    Should:
    This
    action,
    activity,
    or procedural
    step is
    suggested
    but not
    required.
    18.2.21
    Stock solution:
    A
    solution
    containing
    an
    analyte
    that is
    prepared
    using
    a
    reference
    material
    traceable
    to EPA,
    the
    National
    Institute
    of
    Science
    and
    Technology
    (NIST),
    or
    a
    source
    that will
    attest to
    the
    purity
    and authenticity
    of
    the reference
    material.
    22

    Experiment
    8*
    Determination
    of
    Radium-226
    and
    Radium-228
    in
    Drinking
    Water
    Objective
    To
    measure
    the
    naturally-occun-ing
    radium
    isotopes
    226
    Ra
    and
    228
    Ra
    in
    drinking
    water.
    Introduction
    One
    important
    parameter
    in
    determining
    the
    quality
    of
    drinking
    water
    is
    the
    measurement
    of
    its
    radioactivity
    level.
    The
    two
    main
    radium
    isotopes
    of
    concern
    are
    226
    Ra,
    a
    progeny
    of
    naturally-occurring
    238
    U,
    and
    228
    Ra,
    a progeny
    of
    naturally-occurring
    232
    Th.
    The
    decay
    series
    for
    these
    natural
    radionuclides,
    as
    well
    as
    are
    given
    in Appendices
    2-4
    Earlier
    methods
    used
    in
    the analysis
    of
    radium
    isotopes
    in
    water
    required
    labor-intensive
    radiochemical
    separations
    and subsequent
    measurement
    of
    alpha
    particles
    for
    226
    Ra
    and
    beta
    particles
    for
    228
    Ra.
    The
    method
    used
    in
    this
    experiment
    applies
    simpler
    gamma-ray
    spectral
    analysis
    of the
    progeny
    of
    both
    226
    Ra
    and
    238
    Ra.
    The
    analysis,
    described
    in Part
    8A,
    begins
    with
    the
    co-precipitation
    of
    226
    Ra
    and
    228
    Ra
    on barium
    sulfate
    (K
    = 1.0
    x
    10’°).
    The precipitate
    is
    collected
    on
    filter
    paper
    and
    stored,
    to
    await
    the ingrowth
    of
    radioactive
    progeny.
    The
    222
    Rn
    daughter
    of
    226
    Ra
    is strongly
    retained
    in
    the
    barium
    sulfate
    precipitate,
    together
    with
    its short-lived
    progeny
    that emit
    gamma
    rays.
    The
    228
    Ac
    daughter
    of
    228
    Ra
    that
    emits
    gamma
    rays
    co-precipitates
    together
    with
    its
    parent.
    By
    counting
    a
    major
    gamma
    ray
    from
    214
    Pb
    (351.9
    keV)
    and
    one
    from
    214
    Bi
    (609.3
    keV),
    the
    activity
    of
    226
    Ra
    is determined.
    By
    counting
    two
    major
    gamma
    rays
    emitted
    by
    22
    tAc
    (338.3
    and
    911.2
    keV),
    the activity
    of
    228
    Ra
    is
    determined.
    Measurement
    of
    two gamma
    rays
    per radium
    parent
    is
    recommended
    to
    balance
    the
    lesser
    detection
    efficiency
    with
    use
    of
    only one
    gamma
    ray
    each,
    and
    the
    greater
    potential
    for
    interferences
    with
    the
    additional
    (more
    than
    2) gamma
    rays
    that
    are emitted.
    *
    Prepared
    by Robert
    Rosson,
    Environmental
    Radiation
    Center,
    EOSL,
    GTRI,
    Georgia
    Institute
    of
    Technology,
    Atlanta
    GA
    30332—0841
    67

    68
    Experiment
    8
    22
    Ra
    a..
    222JZn
    2up
    0
    1
    Pb
    2l1j
    214
    Po
    *
    6a
    3S25d
    3)Snrn
    ‘jg
    Figure
    8.1 Radium-226
    and direct
    progeny.
    22
    SRa
    22
    Ac
    iZ.i*.
    .
    623
    h
    Figure
    8.2
    Radium-228
    and
    direct
    progeny.
    Figures
    8.1 and
    8.2 show
    the short-lived
    radioactive
    decay
    chains
    for
    226
    Ra
    and
    228
    Ra,
    respectively,
    to illustrate
    the
    relationship
    of
    the progeny
    to
    the
    two
    radium
    isotopes.
    Long-lived
    radionuclides
    continue
    both the
    chains.
    For
    226
    Ra,
    26 days
    are needed
    (based
    on
    7
    half
    lives
    of
    the
    longest-lived
    progeny
    in
    the chain,
    222Rn)
    to reach
    99% of
    radioactive
    equilibrium
    of
    the progeny.
    If
    less time
    is to
    be
    allowed
    for
    the
    ingrowth
    of
    222
    Ri-i
    then
    the fractional
    ingrowth
    must
    be calculated
    to
    obtain
    the
    amount
    of 226
    Ra
    in
    the sample.
    For
    this calculation,
    the ingrowth
    factor
    is
    (1—e)
    where
    A is
    the
    decay
    constant
    (A =
    0.6931t
    172
    )
    for
    222
    The
    ingrowth
    calculation
    is
    illustrated
    in
    Example
    1.
    Example
    1
    Problem:
    A
    purified
    radium
    sample
    is counted
    for gamma
    rays,
    5.2 days
    after
    the
    chemical
    separation
    of barium
    sulfate
    from
    a water
    sample.
    (5.2
    days
    is
    the
    interval
    from the
    separation
    time
    to the mid-time
    of
    the counting
    period).
    What
    fraction
    of the activity
    of
    226
    Ra
    is
    observed
    in the
    gamma
    ray
    count?
    Solution:
    The
    half
    life of
    222
    Rii is
    t
    112
    =
    3.825
    days.
    The equation
    for the
    fraction
    of
    equilibrium
    activity
    is:
    1
    Insert
    the
    appropriate
    values:
    A
    226
    =
    = 0.181 days
    1
    t=5.2
    days
    e226t
    = I
    9421
    = 1—0.39
    = 0.61
    The activity
    observed
    at 5.2 days
    is 61%
    of
    saturation
    activity.
    The
    value
    observed
    at
    the
    5.2
    day
    count time
    is divided
    by 0.61
    to obtain
    value
    of
    the
    saturation
    activity.
    The
    case of 228
    Ra
    is simpler
    than
    that
    in Example
    1.
    Although
    the half
    life
    of 228
    Ac
    requires
    a 2-day
    interval
    to exceed
    99% of
    equilibrium,
    no
    delay
    is needed
    because
    228
    Ac
    also is
    co-precipitated
    with
    barium
    sulfate,
    so
    that
    initial
    radioactive
    equilibrium
    within
    the
    precipitate
    remains
    undisturbed.
    Hence,
    the
    sample
    can
    be counted
    immediately
    for its
    228
    Ra
    content
    with the
    Ge detector
    and
    gamma-ray
    spectrometer
    system.
    The
    count
    must
    be
    delayed
    only
    for
    ingrowth
    of the
    226
    Ra
    progeny.
    A screening
    measurement
    of gross
    alpha
    activity
    prescribed
    by
    EPA in
    its
    thinking-water
    regulations
    specifies

    Detei-niination
    of
    Radium-226
    and
    Radium-228
    in
    Drinking
    Water
    69
    that a
    gross
    alpha-particle
    activity
    of 5 pCi/L
    (0.2
    BqIL)
    or
    less
    eliminates
    the need
    for 226
    Ra
    analysis,
    and
    thus,
    the
    need for
    delayed
    counting.
    Some
    water
    samples
    also contain
    3.66-d
    224
    Ra,
    a progeny
    of
    228
    Ac
    and
    228
    Th.
    If
    the sample
    is
    measured
    within
    about one
    week
    of
    collection
    by
    gamma-ray
    spectrometer,
    the characteristic
    gamma
    rays
    of
    224
    Ra
    (at
    low
    intensity)
    and
    of its
    progeny
    212
    Pb
    and
    208
    T1
    (at higher
    intensity)
    can be
    detected.
    Storing
    the
    water
    sample
    for
    several
    weeks
    before
    processing
    will
    remove
    224
    Ra
    by
    radioactive
    decay.
    A
    reagent
    blank is
    processed
    in Part
    8B
    of
    this
    experiment
    to resolve
    the
    problem
    of
    contamination due to
    airborne
    222
    Bji
    and
    its progeny.
    The
    special
    background
    problem
    encountered
    with
    measuring
    progeny
    of
    226
    Ra
    is that
    one
    of them
    — is a gas
    that emanates
    from the
    ground
    and building
    materials
    such
    as concrete
    and
    brick,
    accompanies
    the
    air in
    the laboratory
    and
    the
    counting
    room, and
    can be
    retained
    in
    the
    barium
    sulfate
    precipitate
    and
    its
    filter paper.
    The
    concentration
    of 222
    Rn
    and
    its
    short-lived
    progeny
    in
    air
    fluctuates
    with
    meteorological
    conditions
    and
    room
    ventilation,
    so
    that
    the
    background
    count
    rate
    in
    the
    spectral
    analysis
    regions
    of
    interest
    also
    can
    vary. To
    resolve
    this
    problem,
    either
    the contamination
    due
    to
    222
    Rn
    progeny
    must
    be maintained
    sufficiently
    low
    that
    its
    fluctuation
    does
    not measurably
    affect
    the count
    rate,
    or the background
    must
    be monitored
    for each
    batch of
    samples.
    In
    Part 8C,
    the barium
    carrier
    is prepared
    and
    a
    standard
    source
    of 226
    Ra
    and
    228
    Ra
    is
    prepared
    and counted
    to
    calibrate
    the Ge
    detector
    for this
    radium
    analysis.
    The
    counting
    efficiency
    for
    three
    of
    the
    four characteristic
    gamma
    rays
    that are
    used
    to
    determine
    the
    activity
    of the
    two
    radium
    isotopes
    can
    be
    derived
    from a
    curve of
    efficiency
    vs.
    energy
    of the
    type prepared
    in
    Experiment
    2.
    The
    efficiency
    for
    the 0.6093-MeV
    gamma
    ray, however,
    lies
    below this
    curve
    because
    of a complication
    associated
    with
    two
    gamma
    rays
    that are
    emitted
    simultaneously
    with
    good
    efficiency,
    in this
    case,
    numerous
    more
    energetic
    gamma
    rays
    of 214
    Bi.
    The
    counting
    efficiency
    of
    this gamma
    ray
    must
    be determined
    for
    the specific
    Ge
    detector
    dimensions
    and sample
    location.
    Safety
    Reminder
    • Follow
    the
    usual
    safety
    procedures
    when
    working
    in
    a
    radiological
    laboratory.
    • Caution
    should
    be
    exercised
    when
    preparing
    and
    working
    with
    corrosive
    mineral
    acids.
    • All
    liquids
    and
    solids
    are
    to be
    properly
    disposed
    according
    to
    laboratory
    rules
    and protocol.
    Equipment
    o
    1
    0-mL
    and 1,000
    mL
    graduated
    cylinders
    o
    Borosilicate
    beaker,
    1-
    2-, or 4-L
    o
    Beakers,
    100
    mL
    o
    Stirring
    rods,
    glass
    Pipette,
    5 mL

    70
    Experiment
    8
    o
    Pipetter
    capable
    of
    measuring
    tenths
    of
    mL
    o
    Heated
    magnetic
    stirrer
    and stir
    bar
    o
    Analytical
    balance
    (capable
    of weighing
    to
    nearest
    0.01
    mg)
    o
    Filtering
    apparatus
    o
    Filter
    circles
    (Whatman
    42,
    2.5
    cm
    diameter
    or
    suitable
    size for
    filtering
    apparatus)
    o
    Ring
    and
    Disk
    mount
    o
    Mylar
    film
    cover
    o
    Vacuum
    pump
    o
    Reagent
    bottles
    o
    Sintered-glass
    crucible,
    fine
    porosity
    o
    Drying
    oven
    o
    Plastic
    squirt
    bottle
    for deionized
    water
    Note:
    All
    glassware
    for
    the
    experiment
    should
    be
    acid-washed
    and
    rinsed
    with
    deionized
    water
    before
    use.
    Reagents
    226
    Ra
    standard
    solution,
    diluted
    to
    concentration
    of about
    40
    Bq per
    mL, in
    0.01
    N
    HNO
    3
    228
    Ra
    standard
    solution,
    diluted
    to
    concentration
    of
    about
    40
    Bq
    per
    mL,
    in
    0.01
    N
    HNO
    3
    • Concentrated
    HNO
    3
    • Concentrated
    HC1
    • Concentrated
    H
    2
    S0
    4
    • Barium
    chloride:
    Reagent
    grade
    BaC1
    2
    .2H
    20
    Barium
    carrier,
    standardized,
    9
    mg
    Ba
    2
    /mL:
    Dissolve
    16.01
    g
    of
    BaCl
    7
    .2H
    20
    in deionized
    water,
    add
    5 mL of
    concentrated
    nitric
    acid,
    and
    dilute
    to
    1 L with
    deionized
    water.
    (See
    Barium
    Carrier
    Standardization
    at
    end
    of Part
    8C.)
    • Sulfuric
    acid,
    18
    N:
    Cautiously
    add
    500
    mL
    of concentrated
    sulfuric
    acid
    to
    400
    mL of
    deionized
    water
    and dilute
    to
    1 L
    with
    deionized
    water.
    Note:
    The
    reaction
    of
    concentrated
    sulfuric
    acid
    with water
    is
    an
    extremel’
    exothermic
    one.
    Add concentrated sulfuric
    acid to
    water
    in
    small
    quantities,
    with
    stirring.
    • Sulfuric
    acid,
    0.01
    N:
    Add
    0.55
    mL
    of
    18 N
    H
    2
    S0
    4
    to 100
    niL deionized
    water
    and dilute
    to
    1
    L.
    • Ethanol,
    95%
    • Diethyl
    ether
    8A.
    Determination
    of
    Radium
    in
    Drinking
    Water
    Procedure
    Step
    1.
    Measure
    the
    volume
    of
    preserved
    drinking
    water
    in
    a
    large
    graduated
    cylinder
    and
    record
    the
    volume
    to the
    nearest
    1
    mL.
    The
    sample
    should
    have
    been
    preserved
    with
    4
    niL
    of
    concentrated
    HNO3
    per gallon
    (3.7 L)
    of
    drinking
    water
    or enough
    concentrated
    HNO
    3
    to
    make
    the
    pH of
    the
    water
    <2.

    Determination
    of Radium-226
    and Radium-228
    in
    Drinking
    Water
    71
    Transfer
    to
    a beaker.
    The
    instructor
    will
    specify
    the
    quantity
    of water
    in
    the
    sample.
    Step
    2.
    Add
    10 mL of
    concentrated
    HCI for
    every liter
    of water
    used
    and
    mix
    thoroughly.
    Step
    3.
    Accurately
    pipette
    5.0 mL
    of
    barium
    carrier
    (9 mg/mL)
    into
    the
    sample.
    Stir
    and
    heat to
    boiling.
    Step 4.
    Precipitate
    barium
    sulfate
    by
    adding
    10 mL of
    18
    N
    H
    2
    S0
    4
    in
    a fine
    stream
    while
    stirring.
    Record
    the date
    and
    time
    of
    precipitation.
    Cool
    30
    minutes
    in
    an
    ice bath
    or allow
    overnight
    settling
    in
    covered
    beaker.
    Date
    and time
    of BaSO
    4
    precipitation:
    Note:
    The
    following
    steps describe
    a specific
    method
    offiltering,
    weighing
    and
    mounting
    the sample.
    The
    instructor
    may
    provide
    alternate
    instructions
    for preparing
    the
    barium
    sulfate source
    appropriate
    for the
    available
    counting
    facilities.
    Step
    5.
    Filter the
    solution
    that contains
    the BaSO
    4
    through
    a tared
    filter.
    One
    approach
    is to let
    the
    precipitate
    settle and
    then
    decant
    carefully
    approximately
    800 mL
    of
    a
    1-L
    sample;
    slurry
    the precipitate
    in
    the remaining
    water, pour
    it
    through
    the
    filter;
    and wash
    any
    remaining
    precipitate
    from
    the
    beaker
    to the
    filter
    with
    a jet
    of
    deionized
    water.
    Avoid
    pulling
    excess
    air through
    the
    filter
    because
    airborne
    radon progeny
    will add
    to the
    sample
    counting
    results
    (see
    Part 8B).
    Step
    6.
    Wash
    and dry
    the
    precipitate
    on the
    filter
    with 10
    mL
    of
    ethanol,
    followed
    by
    10 mL
    of
    diethyl
    ether.
    Turn
    off the suction
    as the
    last of the
    diethyl
    ether
    passes through
    the
    filter.
    Step
    7.
    Remove
    the dried
    filter with
    the precipitate.
    Weigh
    the tared
    filter
    on
    a tared planchet
    to the nearest
    0.1
    mg. Record
    the
    weight
    in Data
    Table
    8.1
    Step 8.
    Mount
    the
    precipitate
    in
    a holder
    such
    as
    a ring
    and disk
    with Mylar
    cover.
    Label
    the
    sample
    according
    to counting
    room
    protocol.
    Step
    9.
    Count
    immediately
    for
    60,000
    s with
    a
    Ge detector
    plus
    gamma-ray
    spectrometer
    to observe
    the
    gamma
    rays
    emitted
    by
    the 228
    Ra
    daughter
    in
    the
    sample
    if these
    results
    are needed
    promptly.
    Count
    after 2
    — 4
    weeks
    to
    permit ingrowth
    of the 226
    Ra
    progeny
    and
    determine
    the
    levels
    of
    both
    226
    Ra
    and
    228
    Ra.
    Record
    mid-time
    of counting.
    Record
    net
    count
    rates
    in
    energy
    regions of
    interest
    in Data
    Table 8.2
    and
    8.3.
    Dates
    and
    mid-times
    of counting:
    Chemical
    Yield
    Calculation
    Subtract
    the
    tared filter
    paper
    plus
    planchet
    weight
    from
    the combined
    weight
    of the
    filter,
    planchet,
    and precipitate
    to
    determine
    the net weight
    of
    the
    BaSO
    4
    precipitate.
    Enter result
    in
    Data Table
    8.1
    Divide
    this net
    weight of
    the
    precipitate
    by the theoretical
    weight
    of the
    precipitate
    based
    on
    the amount
    of

    72
    Experiment
    8
    standardized
    barium
    carrier
    that
    is
    used
    in the
    precipitate.
    This
    is the
    chemical
    yield
    (Y)
    for
    the
    sample
    precipitate.
    Data
    Table
    8.1 Chemical
    yield
    Mass
    Filter
    Paper
    +
    Precipitate
    + planchet
    Filter
    Paper
    + planchet
    Barium
    Carrier
    (as
    BaSO
    4
    )
    Final
    mass
    of
    barium
    sulfate
    =chenncal
    yield
    (8.1)
    Initial
    mass
    of
    barium
    sulfate
    Chemical
    Yield
    =
    Counting
    After
    the
    selected
    ingrowth
    period,
    record
    the time
    and count
    the
    sample
    according
    to
    the counting
    procedures.
    The
    count
    time
    may
    be adjusted
    if
    the
    radium
    concentration
    is
    higher
    than
    usual
    or
    the detector
    counting
    efficiency
    is
    unusually
    high
    or
    low.
    Ingrowth
    interval:
    Treatment
    of Gamma-Ray
    Counting
    Data
    Radium-226
    Concentration
    Calculation
    Determine
    the
    amount
    of
    226
    Ra
    according
    to
    the following
    equation
    for the
    351.9
    keV
    gamma-ray
    of
    the progeny
    214
    Pb
    and
    the
    609.3
    keV
    gamma-ray
    of
    the
    progeny
    214
    Bi,
    respectively.
    A
    5
    =
    [O.O37VD
    5
    E]
    ()
    (8.2)
    Where
    A
    the
    concentration
    of
    226
    Ra
    in
    pCiIL,
    0.037
    = conversion
    factor
    from
    disintegrations
    per
    second
    to
    picocuries
    (pCi)
    [0.037
    dps
    =
    1 pCi],
    Y
    5
    =
    chemical
    yield
    determined
    for
    the
    sample,
    =
    ingrowth
    factor
    (1
    - e_Xt),
    where
    X
    =
    0.693/t
    175
    ;
    t
    = time
    interval
    in
    d
    between the separation
    of the
    radium
    from
    the
    water
    and
    the
    midpoint
    of
    the
    counting
    time,
    and
    t
    112
    = half
    life
    of
    222
    Pj
    of
    3.82
    ci,
    R
    = net
    counts
    per
    s
    for the
    gamma-ray
    under
    consideration
    (background
    and
    Compton
    contributions
    have
    been
    subtracted;
    the
    uncertainty
    or
    error
    reported
    for
    that
    gamma
    ray
    should
    be
    noted),
    F
    =
    branching
    ratio
    for
    gamma-ray
    under
    consideration;
    see
    Data
    Table
    8.2
    for
    value,

    Determination
    of Radium-226
    and
    Radium-228
    in Drinking
    Water
    73
    =
    counting
    efficiency
    of specific
    gamma
    ray;
    see
    Part
    8.C
    for
    measurement,
    and
    V
    =
    sample
    volume,
    L.
    Record
    all information
    in
    DataTable
    8.2 Based
    on the
    values
    calculated
    •for
    each
    gamma-ray
    and
    their
    respective
    uncertainties,
    calculate
    a
    weighted
    average
    for
    the two.
    See
    section
    on
    Weighted
    Average
    Calculations
    in
    Appendix
    6.
    Report
    the
    value
    as pCi
    or
    Bq
    226
    Ra
    per
    L water
    with
    its
    uncertainty.
    Data
    Table
    8.2
    Activity
    of
    226
    Ra
    226
    Ra
    351.9
    keVy
    609.3
    keVy
    Sample
    volume
    (V)
    Chemical
    Yield
    Fraction
    (Y)
    Ingrowth
    factor
    (D)
    Net
    gamma
    ray
    count
    rate
    (R)
    Branching
    ratio
    (Fi)
    0.358
    0.448
    Counting
    efficiency
    (8)
    Activity
    226
    Ra
    (pCiIL
    ±
    a)
    Activity
    226
    Ra
    in pCiIL
    Radium-228
    Concentration
    Calculation
    Determine
    the amount
    of
    228
    Ra
    according
    to
    the above
    equation,
    but for
    the
    338.3
    keV
    and
    911.2
    keV gamma-rays
    of
    the
    progeny
    228
    Ac.
    The
    following
    items
    are
    different
    from
    the
    above
    equation
    for
    226
    Ra:
    D
    refers
    to the
    228
    Ac
    half-life
    of
    6.15
    h,
    but
    parent
    and
    daughter
    are
    in
    equilibrium
    (D
    = 1.00)
    immediately
    because
    both
    are
    co-precipitated
    with
    barium
    sulfate.
    F
    1
    refers
    to
    the
    branching
    ratios
    of the
    two
    characteristic
    gamma
    rays
    of
    228
    Ac
    that
    are shown
    in
    Data
    Table
    8.3
    Record
    the
    data
    for this
    set
    of calculations
    in
    Data
    Table
    8.3
    Based
    on
    the
    values
    calculated
    for
    each gamma-ray
    and their
    respective
    uncertainties,
    calculate
    a weighted
    average
    for
    the two.
    See
    section
    on
    Weighted
    Average
    Calculations
    in Appendix
    6. Report
    the
    value
    as
    pCi
    or Bq
    228
    Ra
    per
    L water
    with
    its
    uncertainty.
    Data
    Table
    8.3
    Activity
    of
    228
    Ra
    228
    Ra
    338.3
    keVy
    911.2
    keVy
    Sample
    volume
    (V)
    Chemical
    Yield
    Fraction
    (Y)
    Ingrowth
    factor (D)
    Net
    gamma
    ray
    count
    rate
    (R)
    Branching
    ratio
    (F
    1
    )
    0.1
    13
    0.266
    Counting
    efficiency
    (8)
    Activity
    228
    Ra
    (pCi/L
    ±
    r)
    Activity
    228
    Ra
    in
    pCiIL
    (weighted
    average)

    74
    Experiment
    8
    8B.
    Preparation
    of
    a Reagent
    Blank
    and
    Testing
    for
    Airborne
    Radon
    and
    Progeny
    Procedure
    Note:
    If both
    the
    reagent
    blank
    and
    testing
    for
    airborne
    radon
    progeny
    are
    to
    be
    done,
    petform
    the
    Iwo samples
    in parallel.
    Make
    certain
    that
    glassware
    could
    not
    have
    accumulated
    radon
    progeny
    from
    air while
    standing
    in
    the
    open.
    Step
    1.
    Reagent
    blank.
    Measure
    a
    1-liter
    volume
    of
    deionized
    water.
    Add 1
    mL
    of
    concentrated
    HNO
    3
    to the
    sample.
    Pour
    the
    measured
    volume
    into
    a
    clean
    borosilicate
    beaker
    large
    enough
    to
    contain
    it
    without
    spilling,
    e.g.,
    2-L
    volume.
    Step 2.
    Add
    10 mL
    of
    concentrated
    HCI to
    the
    deionized
    water
    and
    mix
    thoroughly.
    Step
    3.
    Accurately
    pipette
    5.0
    mL of
    barium
    carrier
    (9
    mg/mL)into
    the
    sample.
    Stir
    and
    heat
    to
    boiling.
    Step
    5.
    Precipitate
    barium
    sulfate
    by
    adding
    slowly
    10
    mL of
    18 N
    H,S0
    4
    in
    a fine
    stream
    with
    stirring.
    Record
    date and
    time
    of separation
    of radon
    daughter
    plus
    progeny
    from
    radium
    parent.
    Cool 30
    minutes
    in
    an ice
    bath
    or
    allow
    to
    digest
    overnight
    covered..
    Note:
    The
    following
    steps describe
    a
    specific
    method
    of
    filtering,
    weighing
    and
    mounting
    the
    sample.
    The
    instructor
    may provide
    alternate
    instructions
    for
    preparing
    the
    barium
    sulfate
    source
    app
    ropri
    ate for
    the available
    counting
    facilities.
    Date
    and time
    of
    radium
    separation:
    Step
    6.
    Place
    a tared
    filter
    of
    the
    type
    and
    dimensions
    used
    in Procedure
    8A
    in
    the
    filter
    funnel
    apparatus
    that
    is
    attached
    to
    a
    vacuum
    source.
    Step
    7a. For
    reagent
    blank.
    Filter
    the
    BaSO
    4
    solution
    on
    the tared
    filter
    paper.
    Keep
    filtration
    time
    to
    a minimum
    and
    measure
    the
    total
    time
    that the
    air
    is
    drawn
    through
    the filter.
    Wash
    the
    precipitate
    that
    remains
    in
    the
    beaker
    to
    the
    filter
    by
    rinsing
    the beaker
    with
    a
    jet
    of deionized
    water.
    Wash
    and
    dry
    the
    precipitate
    on the
    filter with
    10
    mL
    of ethanol,
    followed
    by
    10 mL
    of
    diethyl
    ether.
    Turn
    off
    the
    suction
    when
    the final
    amount
    of
    diethyl
    ether
    has
    passed
    through
    the
    filter.
    OR
    Step
    7b.
    For
    detection
    of airborne
    radon
    progeny.
    Filter
    a reagent
    blank
    solution
    that
    contains
    the
    BaSO
    4
    on
    the
    tared
    filter
    paper.
    Wash
    the
    precipitate
    that
    remains
    in
    the
    beaker
    to the
    filter
    by rinsing
    the
    beaker
    with
    a jet
    of
    deionized
    water.
    Wash
    and dry
    the
    precipitate
    on
    the
    filter
    with
    10 ml.
    of
    ethanol,
    followed
    by
    10
    mL
    of
    diethyl
    ether.
    Draw
    air through
    the sample
    for
    a
    measured
    time
    of
    30 minutes
    to
    1
    hour
    to collect
    airborne
    radon
    and

    Determination
    of
    Radium-226
    and
    Radium-228 in
    Drinking
    Water
    75
    Data
    Table
    8.4
    Chemical
    yield
    of
    blank
    and
    airborne
    sample
    Blank
    Airborne
    Sample
    Filter
    Paper
    +
    Precipitate,
    mg
    Filter
    Paper,
    mg
    Barium
    Carrier
    (as precip.
    BaSO
    4
    ),
    mg
    Chemical
    Yield
    daughters.
    Record
    date,
    time
    of
    collection
    of radon
    progeny
    from
    air,
    and
    collection
    period.
    Date,
    time,
    and
    period
    of
    collection
    of
    radon
    progeny
    from
    air:
    ______
    Step
    8.
    Remove
    the
    filter
    with
    the
    precipitate.
    Weigh
    the
    tared
    filter
    on
    a
    tared
    planchet
    the
    nearest
    0.1 mg.
    Record
    the weight
    in
    Table
    8.4
    Step
    9.
    Mount
    the
    precipitate
    on
    a holder
    such
    as a
    ring
    and
    disk,
    and
    cover
    with
    Mylar
    film.
    Label
    the
    sample
    according
    to
    counting
    room
    protocol.
    Step
    10.
    Count
    the
    gamma
    rays
    emitted
    by
    the
    sample
    with
    a Ge
    detector
    plus
    spectrometer
    after
    the
    same
    time
    interval
    as
    in
    Procedure
    8A.
    The
    airborne radioactivity
    sample
    should
    be
    counted
    as soon
    as possible
    after
    sample
    collection,
    with
    data
    recorded
    in
    Data
    Table
    8.5
    Repeat
    counting
    after
    selected
    intervals
    and
    record
    in
    Data
    Table
    8.6,
    as
    indicated
    below.
    Determine
    the
    chemical
    yield
    as described
    in Procedure
    8A,
    based
    on
    the
    information
    recorded
    in
    Data
    Table
    8.4
    Counting
    Reagent
    Blank.
    Inspect
    the
    gamma-ray
    spectrum
    carefully
    to
    detennine
    if
    any
    of the
    gamma-rays
    from
    radium-226
    are
    present.
    If
    so,
    record
    results
    in
    Data
    Table
    8.5
    Detennine
    the
    amount
    according
    to
    the
    process described
    in
    Part
    8A.
    Activity
    226
    Ra
    in pCiIL
    (weighted
    averages):
    Airborne
    Radon
    Progeny.
    Scheme
    1. Count
    the
    sample
    immediately
    on
    the
    germanium detector,
    recording
    the
    time
    interval
    from
    separation
    to filtration
    Record
    in
    Data
    Table
    8.5
    Then
    count
    again
    in
    one
    week,
    followed
    by
    a third
    Data
    Table
    8.5
    Activity
    of
    226
    Ra
    in blank
    and airborne
    sample
    351.9
    keV
    609.3
    keV
    351.9
    keV
    609.3
    keV
    Sample
    volume
    (V)
    Blank
    Airborne
    Sample
    Chemical
    Yield
    Fraction
    (Y)
    Ingrowth
    factor
    (D)
    Net
    gamma
    ray
    count
    rate
    (R)
    Branching
    ratio
    (F
    1
    )
    0.358
    0.448
    0.358
    0.448
    Counting
    efficiency
    (r)
    Activity
    226
    Ra
    (pCi/L
    ±
    o)

    76
    Experiment
    8
    Data
    Table
    8.6
    Gamma-ray
    decay
    study
    of radionuclides
    on
    filters
    Gamma-ray
    energy
    Count
    1
    Count
    2
    Count
    3
    and
    net
    count
    rate
    351.9
    609.3
    351.9
    609.3
    351.9
    609.3
    interval,
    d
    Data
    Table
    8.7 Alpha-
    and beta-particle
    decay
    study
    Interval,
    d
    Gross
    Bkgd.
    Net
    Gross
    Bkgd.
    Net
    a
    a
    a
    3(cps)
    13(cps)
    3(cps)
    (cps)
    (cps)
    (cps)
    count
    in
    two
    weeks
    after
    sample
    collection.
    Be
    sure
    to
    compare
    the
    spectrum
    of the
    sample
    to a detector
    background
    spectrum
    counted
    the same
    length
    of
    time. Record
    results
    in Data
    Table
    8.6.
    Identify
    the
    radionuclides
    by
    gamma
    ray spectrometry.
    Scheme
    2. Count
    the sample
    immediately
    with
    an
    c and
    13
    counter
    (e.g.,
    the
    proportional
    counter)
    for
    200
    minutes.
    Repeat
    the
    count
    each
    day
    for
    14
    days
    or until
    the
    count
    rate equals
    or nearly
    equals
    the
    background.
    Obtain
    background
    counts
    for
    both alpha-particle
    and beta-particle
    counting
    modes.
    Subtract
    respective
    backgrounds
    for
    each
    count
    period
    and
    record
    in
    Data
    Table
    8.7
    Plot
    data
    of alpha-particle
    and beta-particle
    net
    count
    rates
    (on log
    scale)
    on the
    same
    graph
    versus
    time
    (linear
    scale)
    in days.
    8C.
    Preparation
    of 226
    Ra
    and
    228
    Ra
    Standard
    and
    Barium
    Carrier
    Procedure
    Preparation
    and
    counting
    of
    Ra
    226
    and
    228
    Ra
    standards
    for
    calibration
    of
    Ring
    and
    Disk
    source
    (in
    triplicate)
    Step
    1.
    Pipette
    exactly
    5
    mL of
    barium
    carrier
    into
    100-mL
    beaker
    that
    contains
    20 ml
    of deionized
    water.
    Add
    5 drops
    of
    concentrated
    HC1.
    Pipette
    1
    ml
    of
    226
    Ra
    standard
    solution
    and
    also
    pipette
    1 mL
    of
    228
    Ra
    standard
    solution
    into
    the
    beaker.
    Stir
    well.

    Determination
    of Radium-226
    and
    Radium-228
    in
    Drinking
    Water
    77
    Data
    Table
    8.8 Radium
    count
    rate
    226
    Ra
    228
    Ra
    Energy
    (keV)
    351.9
    -y
    609.3
    -y
    338.3
    -y
    911.2
    -y
    Decay
    fraction
    0.358
    0.448
    0.113
    0.266
    Yield (fraction)
    Activity
    (dps)
    Gross
    count rate
    (cps)
    Net count
    rate
    (cps)
    Count
    rate, ingrowth
    corrected
    (cps)
    Counting
    efficiency
    Step 2.
    Heat the
    solution
    to boiling
    and
    add 20
    ml
    of 18
    N
    H
    2
    S0
    4
    in
    a
    steady
    stream
    with
    stirring
    to precipitate
    Ba50
    4
    with
    radium
    standards.
    Digest while
    boiling
    for
    10 minutes.
    Let
    solution
    cool.
    Date
    and
    time
    of precipitation:
    Step
    3.
    Pour
    slurry
    through
    tared filter
    circle
    in filtering
    apparatus.
    Rinse
    beaker
    with
    four 5-mL
    portions
    of
    0.01 N
    H
    2
    S0
    4
    onto
    filter.
    Wash
    and
    dry
    filter
    and
    precipitate
    with
    10 mL
    of ethanol
    and
    then
    with
    10 ml of
    diethyl
    ether.
    Step
    4.
    Transfer
    filter
    to tared
    planchet
    and
    weigh.
    Subtract
    tared
    weights
    to calculate
    weight
    of
    BaSO
    4
    and the
    yield
    of BaSO
    4
    relative
    to
    the
    pipetted
    amount.
    Record
    yield
    in
    Data
    Table
    8.8
    Prepare
    filter
    on
    a
    holder such
    as
    a
    ring and
    disk
    with Mylar
    film cover.
    Store
    for
    counting.
    • Step
    5.
    After
    interval
    of
    about
    4 weeks
    since BaSO
    4
    precipitation,
    count
    filter
    in
    holder
    with
    Ge detector
    and
    spectrometer
    for
    at least
    3,000
    s. Make
    certain
    that
    location
    of holder
    relative
    to the detector
    is
    identical
    for
    this calibration
    measurement
    and
    all
    sample measurements.
    Step 6.
    Record
    the
    gross count
    rates
    of all
    four
    characteristic
    peaks
    in
    Data
    Table
    8.8
    Calculate
    the
    net
    count rate
    for
    each
    peak.
    Use
    equation
    8.2
    (given
    in
    Procedure
    8A)
    to calculate
    the counting
    efficiency,
    a,
    for each
    of
    the
    four
    gamma
    rays;
    this
    is
    based
    on the
    activity,
    A,
    of
    each of
    the two
    standard
    solutions
    in the pipetted
    solution
    volume,
    V
    (i.e.,
    1 mL).
    The
    ingrowth
    factor.
    D,
    is 1.00
    for 22t
    Ra
    and 0.99
    for
    22
    tRa
    when
    the
    interval
    between
    radium
    precipitation
    and counting
    is
    26 days.
    Calculate
    the
    average
    counting
    efficiency
    and standard
    deviation.
    Barium
    carrier
    standardization
    (in
    triplicate)
    Step
    1.
    Pipette exactly
    5.0
    mL of
    carrier
    into
    a clean
    100-mL
    beaker
    that
    contains
    20 mL
    of deionized
    water.
    Add
    5
    drops of
    concentrated
    Rd.
    Heat
    the
    solution
    to boiling
    and
    add
    20
    mL
    of 18
    N
    H
    2
    S0
    4
    in
    a steady
    stream
    with
    stirring.
    Digest
    the
    sample
    on
    the
    hot plate
    for
    10
    minutes.
    Remove
    the
    beaker
    from
    the
    hot
    plate
    and let
    the
    solution
    cool
    to room
    temperature.

    78
    Experiment
    8
    Step 2.
    Slurry the
    precipitate
    and
    filter into
    a
    clean,
    tared
    sintered-glass
    crucible
    of
    fine
    porosity.
    Rinse
    beaker
    with
    four 5-mL
    portions
    of
    0.01
    N
    H,S0
    4
    and
    add
    to
    filter to
    ensure
    quantitative
    transfer
    of all of
    the
    precip
    itate
    to
    the crucible.
    Wash
    the precipitate
    twice
    with
    20 mL
    of 0.01
    N
    H
    2
    SO
    4
    .
    Step
    3.
    Remove
    the
    crucible
    from
    the filtering
    funnel
    and
    dry in
    the oven
    at
    110°C
    for
    2 hours.
    Step
    4. Place
    the crucible
    in
    a
    desiccator
    to
    cool. Weigh
    to constant
    weight.
    Record
    the
    weight
    for
    calculating
    the
    barium mass
    per
    mL. Report
    the
    average
    standardized
    barium
    in
    irig
    Ba
    2
    /mL
    and
    as
    BaSO
    4
    /mL
    (to the
    nearest
    0.1
    mg) and
    label
    bottle (see
    Experiment
    5).
    The
    spread
    in the values
    should
    be
    less than
    1%.
    Net
    weight
    of
    BaSO
    4
    :
    (1)
    ;
    (2)
    ;(3)
    ;
    (average)
    Questions
    1. If
    a sample
    contains
    0.56 pCi
    225
    Ra
    per L, (a)
    calculate
    the
    mgfL of
    226
    Ra
    in
    the water.
    (b) Calculate
    the mg/L
    of natural
    uranium
    that
    would
    be
    in
    the
    water
    if
    the
    226
    Ra
    is
    in
    radioactive
    equilibrium
    with
    its parent
    238
    U.
    2. List
    the
    assumption(s)
    associated
    with
    the reported
    chemical
    yield
    for
    the
    recovery
    of
    radium
    by its
    co-precipitation
    on
    BaSO
    4
    .
    Design an
    experiment
    to test
    assumptions.
    3.
    If the
    chemiáal
    yield
    for
    several
    samples
    is in excess
    of
    100%,
    offer
    plausible
    explanations
    that
    would
    give
    rise to
    this observation.
    How
    would
    you
    correct
    or
    compensate
    for
    this
    observation?
    4.
    Three
    different
    laboratories
    conduct
    an experiment
    to
    determine
    the
    amount
    of airborne
    radioactivity
    on BaSO
    4
    .
    Laboratory
    A
    finds no
    activity;
    B
    observes
    both
    alpha and
    beta
    activity
    that
    decay
    with
    a half life
    of
    several
    days;
    C
    observes
    alpha
    and
    beta
    activity
    that
    increase
    with time.
    Explain
    their
    disparate
    findings.
    5.
    If airborne
    activity
    is
    a serious
    and troublesome
    problem
    for
    a laboratory,
    suggest
    ways
    to eliminate
    or
    minimize
    it.
    6.
    Calculate
    the amount
    of barium
    carrier
    that will
    remain
    in a 4-L
    sample,
    as described
    here.
    What
    percent
    barium
    is lost due
    to
    its solubility?
    Design
    an experiment
    to
    check this
    result.
    See
    the
    introduction
    for the
    solubility
    product value.
    Source
    Adapted
    from
    “Method
    for
    the Determination
    of Radium-228
    and
    Radium
    226
    in Drinking
    Water
    by
    Gamma-ray
    Spectrometry
    Using
    HPGE
    or
    Ge(Li)
    Detectors”,
    ERC,
    GTR[, Georgia
    Institute
    for
    Technology,
    Atlanta.
    GA,
    an
    Approved
    Test Procedure
    of the US
    EPA
    (see Federal
    Register,
    March
    12,
    2007,
    pp.
    1 1,200—I
    1,249).

    Experiment
    8
    *
    Determination
    of
    Radium-226
    and
    Radium-228
    in
    Drinking
    Water
    Objective
    To measure
    the
    naturally-occurring
    radium
    isotopes
    226
    Ra
    and
    228
    Ra
    in
    drinking
    water.
    Introduction
    One
    important
    parameter
    in
    determining
    the
    quality
    of drinking
    water
    is
    the
    measurement
    of its
    radioactivity
    level.
    The
    two
    main
    radium
    isotopes
    of
    concern
    are
    226
    Ra,
    a
    progeny
    of naturally-occurring
    238
    U,
    and
    228
    Ra,
    a progeny
    of
    naturally-occurring
    232
    Th.
    The
    decay
    series
    for
    these
    natural
    radionuclides,
    as
    well
    as
    are
    given
    in
    Appendices
    2-4.
    Earlier
    methods
    used
    in the
    analysis
    of radium
    isotopes
    in water
    required
    labor-intensive
    radiochemical
    separations
    and
    subsequent
    measurement
    of
    alpha
    particles
    for
    226
    Ra
    and
    beta
    particles
    for
    228
    Ra.
    The
    method
    used
    in
    this
    experiment
    applies
    simpler
    gamma-ray
    spectral
    analysis
    of the
    progeny
    of
    both
    “26
    - Ra
    and
    2”8
    - Ra.
    The
    analysis,
    described
    in
    Part
    8A, begins
    with the
    co-precipitation
    of
    226
    Ra
    and
    228
    Ra
    on
    barium
    sulfate
    (K
    = 1.0
    x
    10—10).
    The
    precipitate
    is
    collected
    on
    filter
    paper
    and stored,
    to
    await
    the
    ingrowth
    of
    radioactive
    progeny.
    The
    222
    Pn
    daughter
    of
    226
    Ra
    is
    strongly
    retained
    in
    the barium
    sulfate
    precipitate,
    together
    with
    its
    short-lived
    progeny
    that
    emit
    gamma
    rays.
    The
    228
    Ac
    daughter
    of
    228
    Ra
    that
    emits
    gamma
    rays
    co-precipitates
    together
    with
    its
    parent.
    By counting
    a major
    gamma
    ray from
    214
    Pb
    (351.9
    keV)
    and
    one
    from
    214
    Bi
    (609.3
    keV),
    the
    activity
    of
    226
    Ra
    is
    determined.
    By counting
    two
    major
    gamma
    rays emitted
    by
    228
    Ac
    (338.3
    and
    911.2
    keV),
    the
    activity
    of
    228
    Ra
    is
    determined.
    Measurement
    of two
    gamma
    rays
    per
    radium
    parent
    is
    recommended
    to
    balance
    the
    lesser
    detection
    efficiency
    with
    use
    of
    only
    one
    gamma
    ray
    each,
    and
    the
    greater
    potential
    for interferences
    with
    the additional
    (more
    than
    2) gamma
    rays
    that
    are
    emitted.
    Prepared
    by
    Robert
    Rosson,
    Environmental
    Radiation
    Center,
    EOSL,
    GTRI,
    Georgia
    Institute
    of
    Technology,
    Atlanta
    GA
    30332—0841
    67

    68
    Experiment
    8
    2
    ’Ra
    2
    Rn
    2
    !Spo
    1!_,.
    Pb
    2Ii
    3
    L..
    2Np
    0
    .iL*
    6%)a
    3.2d
    3.OSmi,
    2nn
    Figure
    8.1
    Radium-226
    and
    direct
    progeny.
    22
    R
    •‘
    22
    c
    J..!,.
    623b
    Figure
    8.2
    Radium-228
    and
    direct
    progeny.
    Figures
    8.1 and
    8.2 show the
    short-lived
    radioactive
    decay chains
    for
    226
    Ra
    and 228
    Ra,
    respectively,
    to illustrate
    the relationship
    of the
    progeny
    to the two
    radium
    isotopes. Long-lived
    radionuclides
    continue
    both the
    chains.
    For 226
    Ra,
    26 days
    are
    needed
    (based
    on
    7
    half lives
    of
    the longest-lived
    progeny
    in the chain,
    222Rn)
    to
    reach
    99%
    of radioactive
    equilibrium
    of
    the progeny.
    If
    less
    time is
    to
    be
    allowed
    for
    the
    ingrowth
    of
    222
    Rji,
    then
    the
    fractional
    ingrowth
    must be calculated
    to
    obtain
    the
    amount
    of
    226
    Ra in
    the
    sample. For
    this calculation,
    the ingrowth
    factor
    is
    (
    1
    _AL)
    where
    A is
    the decay
    constant
    (A =
    0.693/t
    112
    )
    for
    222
    Rn.
    The ingrowth
    calculation
    is
    illustrated
    in Example
    1.
    Example
    1
    Problem: A
    purified
    radium sample
    is counted
    for gamma
    rays,
    5.2
    days after
    the chemical
    separation
    of barium
    sulfate
    from
    a water sample.
    (5.2 days
    is
    the interval
    from the
    separation
    time to the mid-time
    of the counting
    period).
    What fraction
    of the
    activity of
    Ra
    226 is observed
    in
    the
    gamma
    ray count?
    Solution:
    The
    half
    life of
    222
    Pj
    is
    t
    112
    =
    3.825
    days.
    The
    equation
    for the
    fraction
    of equilibrium
    activity
    is:
    1
    Insert the
    appropriate
    values:
    A
    226
    =
    = 0.181
    days’
    t=5.2
    days
    I
    e226
    =
    I —
    e
    09421
    = 1 —0.39
    = 0.61
    The activity
    observed
    at 5.2
    days is
    61% of
    saturation
    activity. The
    value
    observed at
    the 5.2
    day count
    time
    is divided
    by 0.61
    to
    obtain value
    of the
    saturation
    activity.
    The case
    of 228
    Ra is simpler
    than that
    in Example
    1. Although
    the half
    life
    of 228
    Ac requires
    a 2-day
    interval
    to exceed
    99%
    of equilibrium,
    no delay
    is
    needed because
    228
    Ac
    also is co-precipitated
    with barium
    sulfate,
    so that
    initial radioactive
    equilibrium
    within
    the
    precipitate
    remains
    undisturbed.
    Hence,
    the
    sample
    can be counted
    immediately
    for
    its
    228
    Ra
    content
    with the
    Ge detector
    and gamma-ray
    spectrometer
    system.
    The
    count
    must
    be delayed
    only for ingrowth
    of
    the
    Ra
    226
    progeny. A screening
    measurement
    of gross
    alpha activity
    prescribed
    by
    EPA
    in its drinking-water
    regulations
    specifies

    Determination
    of
    Radium-226
    and Radium-228
    in
    Drinking
    Water
    69
    that a
    gross
    alpha-particle
    activity
    of
    5
    pCi/L (0.2
    Bq/L)
    or
    less
    eliminates
    the need
    for
    226
    Ra
    analysis,
    and
    thus, the
    need
    for
    delayed
    counting.
    Some
    water
    samples
    also
    contain
    3.66-d
    224
    Ra,
    a
    progeny
    of 228
    Ac
    and
    228
    Th.
    If the
    sample
    is
    measured
    within
    about
    one
    week of
    collection
    by
    gamma-ray
    spectrometer,
    the
    characteristic
    gamma
    rays
    of
    224
    Ra
    (at
    low
    intensity)
    and
    of its
    progeny
    212
    Pb
    and
    208
    Tl
    (at higher
    intensity)
    can be
    detected.
    Storing
    the
    water
    sample for
    several
    weeks
    before processing
    will
    remove
    224
    Ra
    by radioactive
    decay.
    A
    reagent
    blank
    is processed
    in Part
    8B
    of
    this experiment
    to resolve
    the
    problem
    of
    contamination
    due
    to airborne
    222
    Rn
    and
    its progeny.
    The
    special
    background
    problem
    encountered
    with
    measuring
    progeny
    of
    226
    Ra
    is that
    one
    of them
    — 222
    Rn
    — is a
    gas that
    emanates
    from
    the
    ground
    and
    building
    materials
    such
    as concrete
    and brick,
    accompanies
    the
    air
    in the laboratory
    and
    the
    counting
    room,
    and can
    be retained
    in
    the
    barium
    sulfate
    precipitate
    and
    its
    filter paper.
    The
    concentration
    of
    222
    pj
    and
    its short-lived
    progeny
    in
    air
    fluctuates
    with meteorological
    conditions
    and
    room
    ventilation,
    so
    that
    the
    background
    count
    rate
    in
    the
    spectral
    analysis
    regions
    of interest
    also
    can
    vary.
    To
    resolve
    this
    problem,
    either
    the
    contamination
    due
    to
    222
    Rn
    progeny
    must
    be maintained
    sufficiently
    low that
    its fluctuation
    does
    not
    measurably
    affect
    the
    count rate,
    or
    the
    background
    must
    be monitored
    for each
    batch
    of
    samples.
    In
    Part
    8C, the
    barium
    carrier
    is prepared
    and
    a standard
    source
    of
    226
    Ra
    and
    22
    SRa
    is prepared
    and
    counted
    to
    calibrate
    the Ge
    detector
    for
    this radium
    analysis.
    The counting
    efficiency
    for three
    of
    the
    four characteristic
    gamma
    rays
    that
    are
    used
    to
    determine
    the activity
    of the
    two
    radium
    isotopes
    can
    be
    derived
    from
    a curve
    of efficiency
    vs. energy
    of the
    type
    prepared
    in
    Experiment
    2.
    The efficiency
    for
    the 0.6093-MeV
    gamma
    ray, however,
    lies
    below
    this curve
    because
    of
    a complication
    associated
    with two
    gamma
    rays
    that are
    emitted
    simultaneously
    with
    good
    efficiency,
    in
    this
    case,
    numerous
    more energetic
    gamma
    rays of 214
    Bi.
    The
    counting
    efficiency
    of this gamma
    ray
    must
    be determined
    for the
    specific
    Ge
    detector
    dimensions
    and sample
    location.
    Safety
    Reminder
    Follow
    the usual
    safety
    procedures
    when
    working
    in a radiological
    laboratory.
    • Caution
    should
    be
    exercised
    when
    preparing
    and
    working
    with corrosive
    mineral
    acids.
    All
    liquids
    and
    solids
    are
    to
    be properly
    disposed
    according
    to
    laboratory
    rules
    and
    protocol.
    Equipment
    o
    l0-mL
    and
    1,000
    mL
    graduated
    cylinders
    o
    Borosilicate
    beaker,
    1- 2-,
    or
    4-L
    o
    Beakers,
    100
    mL
    o
    Stirring
    rods,
    glass
    o Pipette,
    5
    mL

    70
    Experiment
    8
    o
    Pipetter
    capable
    of measuring
    tenths
    of mL
    o
    Heated
    magnetic
    stirrer
    and
    stir
    bar
    o
    Analytical
    balance
    (capable
    of
    weighing
    to
    nearest
    0.01
    mg)
    o
    Filtering
    apparatus
    o
    Filter
    circles
    (Whatman
    42,
    2.5
    cm diameter
    or
    suitable
    size
    for
    filtering
    apparatus)
    o
    Ring and
    Disk
    mount
    o
    Mylar
    film
    cover
    o
    Vacuum
    pump
    o
    Reagent
    bottles
    o
    Sintered-glass
    crucible,
    fine
    porosity
    o
    Drying
    oven
    o
    Plastic
    squirt
    bottle
    for
    deionized
    water
    Note:
    All glassware
    for
    the experiment
    should
    be
    acid-washed
    and
    rinsed
    with
    deionized
    water
    before
    use.
    Reagents
    226
    Ra
    standard
    solution,
    diluted
    to concentration
    of
    about
    40 Bq
    per
    mL, in
    0.01
    N
    HNO
    3
    228
    Ra
    standard
    solution,
    diluted
    to
    concentration
    of
    about
    40
    Bq per
    niL,
    in
    0.01
    N
    HNO
    3
    Concentrated
    HNO
    3
    • Concentrated
    HC1
    • Concentrated
    H
    2
    S0
    4
    • Barium
    chloride:
    Reagent
    grade
    BaCI
    2
    .2H
    20
    • Barium
    carrier,
    standardized,
    9
    mg
    Ba
    2
    /mL:
    Dissolve
    16.01
    g
    of
    BaC1.,.2H
    20
    in
    deionized
    water,
    add
    5
    mL of
    concentrated
    nitric
    acid,
    and
    dilute
    to
    1 L
    with
    deionized
    water.
    (See Barium
    Carrier
    Standardization
    at end
    of
    Part 8C.)
    Sulfuric
    acid,
    18
    N:
    Cautiously
    add
    500
    mL
    of
    concentrated
    sulfuric
    acid
    to
    400 mL
    of
    deionized
    water
    and
    dilute
    to 1 L
    with
    deionized
    water.
    Note:
    The reaction
    of
    concentrated
    sulfuric
    acid
    with
    water
    is an
    extremely
    exorhermic
    one. Add
    concentrated
    sulfuric
    acid
    to
    water
    in small
    quantities,
    with
    stirring.
    • Sulfuric
    acid,
    0.01
    N:
    Add
    0.55
    mL
    of 18
    N
    H
    2
    S0
    4
    to
    100
    mL
    deionized
    water
    and dilute
    to I
    L.
    • Ethanol,
    95%
    • Diethyl
    ether
    8A. Determination
    of
    Radium
    in
    Drinking
    Water
    Procedure
    Step
    1.
    Measure
    the
    volume
    of
    preserved
    drinking
    water
    in
    a large
    graduated
    cylinder
    and record
    the
    volume
    to the
    nearest
    I mL.
    The
    sample
    should
    have
    been
    preserved
    with
    4
    mL of
    concentrated
    HNO3
    per
    gallon
    (3.7
    L)
    of
    drinking
    water
    or
    enough
    concentrated
    HNO
    3
    to make
    the
    pH of
    the water
    <2.

    Determination
    of Radium-226
    and Radium-228
    in
    Drinking
    Water
    71
    Transfer
    to
    a
    beaker.
    The
    instructor
    will specify
    the
    quantity
    of
    water
    in the
    sample.
    Step
    2. Add
    10 rnL
    of concentrated
    HC1 for
    every
    liter
    of
    water
    used
    and mix
    thoroughly.
    Step
    3.
    Accurately
    pipette
    5.0
    mL of
    barium
    carrier
    (9
    mg/mL)
    into
    the
    sample.
    Stir
    and
    heat
    to boiling.
    Step
    4. Precipitate
    barium
    sulfate
    by
    adding
    10
    mL of
    18
    N
    H
    2
    S0
    4
    in
    a fine
    stream
    while
    stirring.
    Record
    the
    date
    and
    time
    of
    precipitation.
    Cool
    30
    minutes
    in
    an ice
    bath or
    allow
    overnight
    settling
    in covered
    beaker.
    Date
    and
    time
    of BaSO
    4
    precipitation:
    Note:
    The
    following
    steps
    describe
    a specific
    method
    of
    filtering,
    weighing
    and
    mounting
    the
    sample.
    The
    instructor
    may
    provide
    alternate
    instructions
    forpreparing
    the barium
    sulfate
    source
    appropriate
    for
    the
    available
    counting
    facilities.
    Step
    5. Filter
    the solution
    that contains
    the
    BaSO
    4
    through
    a tared
    filter.
    One
    approach
    is
    to let
    the
    precipitate
    settle
    and then
    decant
    carefully
    approximately
    800
    mL
    of a
    I -L
    sample;
    slurry
    the precipitate
    in
    the
    remaining
    water,
    pour it
    through
    the
    filter;
    and
    wash
    any
    remaining
    precipitate
    from
    the
    beaker
    to
    the
    filter
    with ajet
    of
    deionized
    water.
    Avoid
    pulling
    excess
    air through
    the
    filter
    because
    airborne
    radon
    progeny
    will
    add to
    the
    sample
    counting
    results
    (see
    Part 8B).
    Step
    6.
    Wash
    and
    dry
    the precipitate
    on
    the
    filter
    with
    10 mL
    of ethanol,
    followed
    by 10
    mL
    of
    diethyl
    ether.
    Turn
    off the
    suction
    as the
    last
    of
    the
    diethyl
    ether
    passes
    through
    the filter.
    Step
    7.
    Remove
    the
    dried
    filter with
    the
    precipitate.
    Weigh
    the
    tared
    filter
    on
    - a
    tared
    planchet
    to the
    nearest
    0.1
    mg.
    Record
    the
    weight
    in
    Data
    Table
    8.1
    Step 8.
    Mount
    the
    precipitate
    in
    a
    holder
    such as
    a ring
    and
    disk with
    Mylar
    cover.
    Label
    the
    sample
    according
    to
    counting
    room
    protocol.
    Step
    9.
    Count
    immediately
    for
    60,000
    s
    with a
    Ge detector
    plus
    gamma-ray
    spectrometer
    to
    observe
    the gamma
    rays
    emitted
    by
    the
    228
    Ra
    daughter
    in
    the
    sample
    if
    these
    results
    are
    needed
    promptly.
    Count
    after
    2 —
    4 weeks
    to
    permit
    ingrowth
    of
    the
    226
    Ra
    progeny
    and
    determine
    the levels
    of
    both
    226
    Ra
    and
    228
    Ra.
    Record
    mid-time
    of
    counting.
    Record
    net count
    rates
    in energy
    regions
    of interest
    in
    Data
    Table
    8.2
    and 8.3.
    Dates
    and
    mid-times
    of
    counting:
    Chemical
    Yield
    Calculation
    Subtract
    the
    tared
    filter
    paper
    plus
    planchet
    weight
    from
    the
    combined
    weight
    of
    the
    filter,
    planchet,
    and
    precipitate
    to
    determine
    the net
    weight
    of
    the
    BaSO
    4
    precipitate.
    Enter
    result
    in
    Data
    Table
    8.1
    Divide
    this net
    weight
    of the
    precipitate
    by
    the
    theoretical
    weight
    of
    the
    precipitate
    based
    on the
    amount
    of

    72
    Experiment
    8
    standardized
    barium
    carrier
    that is used
    in the
    precipitate.
    This
    is the
    chemical
    yield
    (Y)
    for
    the
    sample precipitate.
    Data
    Table 8.1
    Chemical
    yield
    Mass
    Filter Paper
    + Precipitate
    +
    planchet
    Filter
    Paper
    + planchet
    Barium
    Carrier
    (as BaSO
    4
    )
    Final
    mass of
    barium
    sulfate
    =chemzcal
    yield
    (8.1)
    Initial
    mass
    of
    barium
    sulfate
    Chemical
    Yield
    =
    Counting
    After the
    selected
    ingrowth
    period,
    record
    the
    time and
    count
    the
    sample
    according
    to
    the
    counting
    procedures.
    The
    count
    time
    may
    be adjusted
    if
    the
    radium
    concentration
    is higher
    than
    usual
    or the detector
    counting
    efficiency
    is unusually
    high
    or low.
    Ingrowth
    interval:
    Treatment
    of
    Gamma-Ray
    Counting
    Data
    Radiunz-226
    Concentration
    Calculation
    Determine
    the amount
    of
    226
    Ra
    according
    to
    the
    following
    equation
    for the
    351.9
    keV
    gamma-ray
    of the
    progeny
    214
    Pb
    and the
    609.3
    keV
    gamma-ray
    of
    the
    progeny
    214
    Bi,
    respectively.
    A
    =
    [o.o37DEl
    ()
    (8.2)
    Where
    Ac
    = the
    concentration
    of
    226
    Ra
    in
    pCiIL,
    0.037
    = conversion
    factor from
    disintegrations
    per
    second
    to picocuries
    (pCi)
    [0.037
    rIps
    =
    1 pCi],
    = chemical
    yield
    determined
    for
    the sample,
    D
    = ingrowth
    factor
    (1
    - e_Xt),
    where
    X
    = 0.693/t
    1
    ,
    2
    ;
    t =
    time interval
    in d
    between
    the
    separation
    of
    the
    radium
    from
    the water
    and the
    midpoint
    of the
    counting
    time,
    and
    t
    112 = half
    life of
    222
    Rn
    of
    3.82
    d,
    R =
    net counts
    per
    s
    for the gamma-ray
    under
    consideration
    (background
    and Compton
    contributions
    have
    been
    subtracted;
    the
    uncertainty
    or
    error
    reported
    for
    that
    gamma
    ray
    should
    be noted),
    F = branching
    ratio for
    gamma-ray
    under
    consideration;
    see Data
    Table
    8.2
    for
    value,

    Determination
    of
    Radium-226
    and
    Radium-228
    in
    Drinking
    Water
    73
    = counting
    efficiency
    of
    specific
    gamma
    ray; see
    Part
    8.C
    for
    measurement,
    and
    V = sample
    volume,
    L.
    Record
    all
    information
    in
    DataTable
    8.2 Based
    on the
    values
    calculated
    for
    each
    gamma-ray
    and
    their
    respective
    uncertainties,
    calculate
    a
    weighted
    average
    •for
    the two.
    See
    section
    on Weighted
    Average
    Calculations
    in
    Appendix
    6. Report
    the
    value as
    pCi
    or
    Bq
    226
    Ra
    per
    L
    water
    with
    its
    uncertainty.
    Data
    Table
    8.2 Activity
    of
    226
    Ra
    226
    Ra
    351.9
    keVy
    609.3
    keV-y
    Sample
    volume
    (V)
    Chemical
    Yield
    Fraction
    (Y)
    Ingrowth
    factor
    (D)
    Net
    gamma
    ray
    count rate
    (R)
    Branching
    ratio
    (Ft)
    0.358
    0.448
    Counting
    efficiency
    (E)
    Activity
    226
    Ra
    (pCifL
    ± o)
    Activity
    226
    Ra
    in pCi/L
    (weighted
    average)__...
    Radiuni-228
    Concentration
    Calculation
    Determine
    the
    amount
    of
    22
    SRa
    according
    to
    the above
    equation,
    but
    for
    the
    338.3
    keV and
    911.2
    keV
    gamma-rays
    of the
    progeny
    228
    Ac.
    The
    following
    items
    are different
    from the
    above
    equation
    for 226
    Ra:
    D
    refers
    fo
    the 228
    Ac
    half-life
    of
    6.15
    h,
    but
    parent and
    daughter
    are
    in
    equilibrium
    (D
    1.00)
    immediately
    because
    both
    are
    co-precipitated
    with
    barium
    sulfate.
    F
    1
    refers
    to the
    branching
    ratios
    of the
    two
    characteristic
    gamma
    rays
    of 228
    Ac
    that
    are shown
    in Data
    Table
    8.3
    Record
    the data
    for
    this
    set
    of
    calculations
    in Data
    Table
    8.3
    Based
    on
    the
    values
    calculated
    for each
    gamma-ray
    and
    their
    respective
    uncertainties,
    calculate
    a weighted
    average
    for
    the two.
    See
    section
    on
    Weighted
    Average
    Calculations
    in Appendix
    6. Report
    the
    value
    as
    pCi or
    Bq
    228
    Ra
    per L
    water
    with its
    uncertainty.
    Data
    Table
    8.3 Activity
    of
    228
    Ra
    228
    Ra
    338.3 keV-y
    911.2
    keV-y
    Sample
    volume
    (V)
    Chemical
    Yield
    Fraction
    (Y)
    Ingrowth
    factor
    (D)
    Net gamma
    ray
    count rate
    (R)
    Branching
    ratio
    (F
    1
    )
    0.113
    0.266
    Counting
    efficiency
    (e)
    Activity
    228
    Ra
    (pCilL
    ±
    o)
    Activity
    228
    Ra
    in
    pCiJL
    (weighted
    average)

    74
    Experiment
    8
    8B. Preparation
    of
    a Reagent
    Blank
    and
    Testing
    for
    Airborne
    Radon
    and
    Progeny
    Procedure
    Note:
    If both
    the
    reagent
    blank
    and
    testing
    for
    airborne
    radon progeny
    are
    to
    be
    done,
    peiform
    the
    two samples
    in parallel.
    Make
    certain
    that
    glassware
    could
    not
    have accumulated
    radon
    progeny
    from
    air while
    standing
    in the
    open.
    Step
    1. Reagent
    blank.
    Measure
    a 1-liter
    volume
    of
    deionized
    water.
    Add
    1
    mL
    of
    concentrated
    HNO
    3
    to the sample.
    Pour
    the
    measured
    volume
    into
    a
    clean
    borosilicate
    beaker
    large enough
    to
    contain
    it without
    spilling,
    e.g.,
    2-L
    volume.
    Step
    2. Add
    10 mL
    of concentrated
    HCI
    to the
    deionized
    water
    and
    mix
    thoroughly.
    Step 3.
    Accurately
    pipette
    5.0
    mL
    of
    barium
    carrier
    (9
    mg/mL)into
    the sample.
    Stir and
    heat to
    boiling.
    Step
    5.
    Precipitate
    barium
    sulfate
    by adding
    slowly
    10
    mL
    of
    18
    N H,S0
    4
    in a
    fine stream
    with
    stirring.
    Record
    date
    and time
    of separation
    of
    radon
    daughter
    plus
    progeny
    from
    radium
    parent.
    Cool 30
    minutes
    in an ice
    bath
    or
    allow
    to digest
    overnight
    covered..
    Note.
    The
    following
    steps describe
    a specific
    method
    offiltering,
    weighing
    and mounting
    the
    sample.
    The
    instructor
    may
    provide
    alternate
    instructions
    forpreparing
    the
    barium
    sulfate
    source
    apprap
    riate for
    the available
    counting
    facilities.
    Date
    and
    time of
    radium
    separation:
    Step
    6. Place
    a
    tared
    filter of
    the type
    and dimensions
    used
    in
    Procedure
    8A
    in the
    filter funnel
    apparatus
    that
    is attached
    to
    a
    vacuum
    source.
    Step
    7a.
    For
    reagent
    blank.
    Filter
    the
    BaSO
    4
    solution
    on the
    tared filter
    paper.
    Keep
    filtration
    time
    to a minimum
    and measure
    the
    total
    time
    that
    the air
    is
    drawn
    through
    the
    filter. Wash
    the
    precipitate
    that remains
    in
    the
    beaker
    to
    the
    filter
    by
    rinsing
    the beaker
    with
    a jet of
    deionized
    water.
    Wash
    and dry
    the precipitate
    on the
    filter
    with
    10
    mL
    of ethanol,
    followed
    by
    10
    mL
    of
    diethyl
    ether.
    Turn off
    the
    suction
    when
    the
    final
    amount
    of diethyl
    ether
    has
    passed
    through
    the filter.
    OR
    Step
    7b. For
    detection
    of airborne
    radon
    progeny.
    Filter
    a reagent
    blank
    solution
    that contains
    the
    BaSO
    4
    on
    the
    tared filter
    paper.
    Wash
    the precipitate
    that
    remains
    in
    the beaker
    to the
    filter
    by
    rinsing the
    beaker
    with
    a jet
    of
    deionized
    water.
    Wash
    and
    dry the
    precipitate
    on the
    filter
    with 10
    iriL
    of
    ethanol,
    followed
    by
    10 mL
    of
    diethyl
    ether.
    Draw
    air
    through
    the
    sample
    for a
    measured
    time of
    30
    minutes
    to
    1 hour
    to
    collect
    airborne
    radon
    and

    Determination
    of Radium-226
    and
    Radium-228
    in
    Drinking
    Water
    75
    Data
    Table
    8.4
    Chemical
    yield
    of
    blank
    and
    airborne
    sample
    Blank
    Airborne
    Sample
    Filter
    Paper
    +
    Precipitate,
    mg
    Filter
    Paper,
    mg
    Barium
    Carrier
    (as
    precip.
    BaSO
    4
    ),
    mg
    Chemical
    Yield
    daughters. Record
    date,
    time
    of
    collection
    of radon
    progeny
    from
    air,
    and
    collection period.
    Date,
    time,
    and
    period
    of collection
    of
    radon
    progeny
    from
    air:
    _______
    Step
    8.
    Remove
    the
    filter
    with
    the
    precipitate.
    Weigh
    the
    tared
    filter
    on
    a
    tared
    planchet the
    nearest
    0.1
    mg.
    Record
    the
    weight
    in Table
    8.4
    Step
    9.
    Mount
    the
    precipitate
    on
    a
    holder
    such
    as
    a ring
    and
    disk,
    and
    cover
    with
    Mylar
    film.
    Label
    the
    sample
    according
    to
    counting
    room
    protocol.
    Step
    10.
    Count
    the
    gamma
    rays
    emitted
    by
    the
    sample
    with
    a
    Ge
    detector
    plus
    spectrometer
    after
    the
    same
    time
    interval
    as
    in
    Procedure
    8A.
    The
    airborne
    radioactivity
    sample
    should
    be
    counted
    as
    soon
    as possible
    after
    sample
    collection,
    with
    data
    recorded
    in
    Data
    Table
    8.5
    Repeat
    counting
    after
    selected intervals
    and
    record
    in Data
    Table
    8.6,
    as
    indicated
    below.
    Determine
    the
    chemical
    yield
    as
    described
    in Procedure
    8A,
    based
    on
    the
    information
    recorded
    in
    Data
    Table
    8.4
    Counting
    Reagent
    Blank.
    Inspect
    the gamma-ray
    spectrum
    carefully
    to
    determine
    if
    any
    of
    the
    gamma-rays
    from
    radium-226
    are
    present.
    If
    so,
    record
    results
    in
    Data
    Table
    8.5
    Determine
    the
    amount
    according
    to
    the
    process
    described
    in
    Part
    8A.
    Activity
    226
    Ra
    in
    pCiJL
    (weighted
    averages):
    Airborne
    Radon
    Progeny.
    Scheme
    I.
    Count
    the
    sample
    immediately
    on
    the
    germanium detector,
    recording
    the
    time
    interval
    from
    separation
    to
    filtration
    Record
    in
    Data
    Table
    8.5
    Then
    count
    again
    in
    one
    week,
    followed
    by
    a third
    Data
    Table
    8.5
    Activity
    of
    226
    Ra
    in
    blank
    and
    airborne
    sample
    351.9
    keY
    609.3
    keY
    351.9
    keY
    609.3
    keV
    Sample
    volume (V)
    Blank
    Airborne
    Sample
    Chemical
    Yield
    Fraction
    (Y)
    Ingrowth
    factor
    (D)
    Net
    gamma
    ray
    count
    rate
    (R)
    Branching
    ratio
    (F
    1
    )
    0.358
    0.448
    0.358
    0.448
    Counting efficiency
    (e)
    Activity
    226
    Ra
    (pCi/L
    ±
    o)

    76
    Experiment
    8
    Data Table
    8.6 Gamma-ray
    decay
    study of
    radionuclides
    on filters
    Gamma-ray
    energy
    Count 1
    Count
    2
    Count
    3
    and net count
    rate
    351.9
    609.3
    351.9
    609.3
    351.9
    609.3
    interval, d
    Data Table
    8.7 Alpha-
    and
    beta-particle
    decay
    study
    Interval.
    d
    Gross
    Bkgd.
    Net
    Gross
    Bkgd.
    Net
    c
    o
    3(cps)
    3(cps)
    (cps)
    (cps)
    (cps)
    (cps)
    count
    in
    two
    weeks after
    sample
    collection.
    Be
    sure to compare
    the spectrum
    of
    the sample
    to a detector
    background
    spectrum
    counted the
    same length
    of
    time.
    Record
    results
    in Data
    Table
    8.6. Identify
    the radionuclides
    by
    gamma
    ray
    spectrometry.
    Scheme
    2.
    Count
    the
    sample immediately
    with
    an
    c and
    counter
    (e.g.,
    the
    proportional
    counter)
    for
    200
    minutes.
    Repeat the
    count each day
    for
    14
    days or
    until the count
    rate equals
    or nearly
    equals
    the
    background.
    Obtain
    background
    counts for
    both
    alpha-particle
    and beta-particle
    counting
    modes.
    Subtract
    respective
    backgrounds
    for
    each
    count period
    and
    record
    in Data
    Table 8.7
    Plot data
    of alpha-particle
    and
    beta-particle
    net count
    rates
    (on log
    scale)
    on the same
    graph
    versus
    time (linear
    scale)
    in days.
    8C.
    Preparation
    of
    226
    Ra
    and 228
    Ra
    Standard
    and
    Barium
    Carrier
    Procedure
    Preparation
    and
    counting
    of Ra
    226
    and
    228
    Ra
    standards
    for calibration
    of Ring
    and Disk
    source
    (in triplicate)
    Step
    1. Pipette
    exactly
    5 mL
    of
    barium carrier
    into 100-mi.
    beaker
    that
    contains
    20 ml
    of deionized
    water.
    Add 5 drops
    of concentrated
    HC1.
    Pipette 1
    ml
    of 226
    Ra standard
    solution
    and also
    pipette 1
    mL of 228
    Ra
    standard
    solution
    into
    the beaker.
    Stir well.

    Determination
    of Radium-226
    and Radium-228
    in
    Drinking
    Water
    77
    Data
    Table
    8.8
    Radium
    count
    rate
    226
    Ra
    228
    Ra
    Energy
    (keV)
    351.9
    -y
    609.3
    y
    338.3
    -y
    911.2
    -y
    Decay
    fraction
    0.358
    0.448
    0.113
    0.266
    Yield
    (fraction)
    Activity
    (dps)
    Gross
    count
    rate (cps)
    Net
    count
    rate
    (cps)
    Count
    rate,
    ingrowth
    corrected
    (cps)
    Counting efficiency
    Step
    2. Heat
    the
    solution
    to
    boiling
    and
    add 20
    ml
    of 18
    N
    H
    2
    S0
    4
    in a
    steady
    stream
    with
    stirring
    to precipitate
    BaSO
    4
    with
    radium
    standards.
    Digest
    while
    boiling
    for
    10
    minutes.
    Let
    solution
    cool.
    Date
    and
    time
    of
    precipitation:
    Step
    3.
    Pour
    slurry
    through
    tared
    filter
    circle
    in filtering
    apparatus.
    Rinse
    beaker
    with
    four
    5-mL
    portions
    of 0.01
    N
    H
    7
    S0
    4
    onto
    filter.
    Wash
    and
    dry
    filter
    and
    precipitate
    with
    10
    mL
    of
    ethanol
    and
    then
    with
    10
    ml
    of
    diethyl
    ether.
    Step
    4.
    Transfer
    filter
    to
    tared
    planchet
    and
    weigh.
    Subtract
    tared
    weights
    to
    calculate
    weight
    of
    BaSO
    4
    and
    the
    yield
    of
    BaSO
    4
    relative
    to
    the
    pipetted
    amount.
    Record
    yield
    in
    Data
    Table
    8.8
    Prepare
    filter
    on
    a
    holder
    such
    as
    a ring
    and
    disk
    with
    Mylar
    film
    cover.
    Store
    for
    counting.
    Step
    5.
    After
    interval
    of
    about
    4 weeks
    since
    BaSO
    4
    precipitation,
    count
    filter
    in
    holder
    with
    Ge
    detector
    and
    spectrometer
    for
    at
    least
    3,000
    s.
    Make
    certain
    that
    location
    of holder
    relative
    to
    the
    detector
    is
    identical
    for this
    calibration
    measurement
    and
    all sample
    measurements.
    Step
    6. Record the gross
    count
    rates
    of
    all four
    characteristic
    peaks
    in
    Data
    Table
    8.8
    Calculate
    the
    net
    count
    rate
    for
    each
    peak.
    Use
    equation
    8.2
    (given
    in Procedure
    8A)
    to
    calculate
    the
    counting
    efficiency,
    a,
    for each
    of
    the
    four
    gamma
    rays;
    this
    is
    based
    on
    the activity,
    A,
    of
    each
    of the
    two
    standard
    solutions
    in
    the
    pipetted
    solution
    volume,
    V
    (i.e.,
    1
    mL).
    The
    ingrowth
    factor,
    D,
    is 1.00
    for
    228
    Ra
    and
    0.99
    for
    226
    Ra
    when
    the
    interval
    between
    radium
    precipitation
    and counting
    is
    26 days.
    Calculate
    the
    average
    counting
    efficiency
    and
    standard
    deviation.
    Barium
    carrier
    standardization
    (in
    triplicate)
    Step
    1.
    Pipette
    exactly
    5.0
    mL
    of
    earner
    into
    a
    clean
    100-mL
    beaker
    that
    contains
    20
    mL
    of deionized
    water.
    Add
    5 drops
    of concentrated
    HC1.
    Heat
    the
    solution
    to
    boiling
    and
    add
    20
    mL
    of 18
    N
    H
    2
    SO
    4
    in
    a
    steady
    stream
    with
    stirring.
    Digest
    the sample
    on
    the hot
    plate
    for
    10
    minutes.
    Remove
    the
    beaker
    from
    the
    hot
    plate
    and
    let
    the
    solution
    cool
    to room
    temperature.

    78
    Experiment
    8
    Step
    2. Slurry
    the
    precipitate
    anti
    filter
    into a
    clean,
    tared sintered-glass
    crucible
    of fine
    porosity.
    Rinse beaker
    with
    four
    5-mL
    portions
    of
    0.01
    N
    H
    9
    S0
    4
    and add
    to
    filter to
    ensure
    quantitative
    transfer
    of
    all of
    the precip
    itate
    to
    the
    crucible.
    Wash
    the
    precipitate
    twice
    with
    20 mL
    of
    0.01
    N
    H
    2
    S0
    4
    .
    Step
    3. Remove
    the
    crucible
    from
    the filtering
    funnel
    and
    dry
    in
    the
    oven
    at
    110°C
    for 2
    hours.
    Step
    4.
    Place the
    crucible
    in
    a desiccator
    to cool.
    Weigh
    to constant
    weight.
    Record
    the weight
    for
    calculating
    the
    barium mass
    per
    mL. Report
    the
    average
    standardized
    barium
    in
    mg
    Ba
    2
    /inL
    and as
    BaSO
    4
    /mL
    (to the
    nearest
    0.1
    mg)
    and
    label
    bottle (see
    Experiment
    5). The
    spread
    in
    the values
    should
    be
    less
    than
    1%.
    Net weight
    of
    BaSO
    4
    :
    (1)
    ;
    (2)
    ;(3)
    ;
    (average)
    Questions
    1. If a sample
    contains
    0.56 pCi
    26
    Ra
    per L,
    (a)
    calculate
    the
    rngIL of
    226
    Ra
    in the
    water.
    (b) Calculate
    the rngIL
    of natural
    uranium
    that
    would
    be in
    the
    water
    if the
    226
    Ra
    is
    in radioactive
    equilibrium
    with
    its parent
    238
    U.
    2.
    List
    the
    assumption(s)
    associated
    with
    the
    reported
    chemical
    yield
    for the
    recovery
    of radium
    by
    its co-precipitation
    on
    BaSO
    4
    .
    Design
    an
    experiment
    to
    test
    assumptions.
    3.
    If
    the
    chemical
    yield
    for several
    samples
    is in excess
    of
    100%,
    offer
    plausible
    explanations
    that would
    give
    rise to
    this observation.
    How
    would
    you
    correct
    or
    compensate
    for
    this
    observation?
    4. Three
    different
    laboratories
    conduct an
    experiment
    to
    determine
    the
    amount
    of
    airborne
    radioactivity
    on
    BaSO
    4
    .
    Laboratory
    A
    finds no
    activity;
    B
    observes
    both
    alpha and
    beta
    activity
    that decay
    with
    a half life
    of
    several
    days;
    C
    observes
    alpha
    and
    beta activity
    that
    increase
    with time.
    Explain
    their
    disparate
    findings.
    5.
    If
    airborne
    activity
    is a
    serious
    and troublesome
    problem
    for
    a
    laboratory,
    suggest
    ways
    to eliminate
    or
    minimize
    it.
    6. Calculate
    the amount
    of
    barium
    carrier
    that will
    remain
    in a 4-L
    sample,
    as
    described
    here.
    What
    percent
    barium
    is lost due
    to
    its solubility?
    Design
    an experiment
    to
    check this
    result.
    See the
    introduction
    for
    the solubility
    product
    value.
    Source
    Adapted
    from
    “Method
    for
    the Determination
    of
    Radium-228
    and
    Radium
    226 in
    Drinking
    Water
    by Gamma-ray
    Spectrometry
    Using
    HPGE
    or
    Ge(Li)
    Detectors”,
    ERC.
    GTRI,
    Georgia
    Institute
    for
    Technology,
    Atlanta.
    GA,
    an
    Approved
    Test Procedure
    of
    the US
    EPA
    (see Federal
    Register,
    March
    12,
    2007,
    pp.
    11,200—I
    1,249).

    STATE
    OF
    ILLiNOIS
    COUNTY
    OF
    SANGAMON
    )
    )
    SS
    )
    PROOF
    OF
    SERVICE
    I, the
    undersigned,
    on
    oath
    state
    that
    I
    have
    served
    the
    attached
    Illinois
    Environmental
    Protection
    Agency’s
    Comments
    upon
    the
    person
    to whom
    it
    is
    directed,
    by placing
    it
    in an
    envelope
    addressed
    to:
    TO:
    John
    Therriault,
    Clerk
    Illinois
    Pollution
    Control
    Board
    James
    R. Thompson
    Center
    100
    W.
    Randolph,
    Suite
    11-500
    Chicago,
    IL
    60601
    Matt
    Dunn,
    Environmental
    Bureau
    Chief
    Office
    of
    the Attorney
    General
    69
    West
    Washington
    Street,
    Suite
    1800
    Chicago,
    IL
    60602
    and
    mailing
    it
    First
    Class
    Mail
    from
    Springfield,
    sufficient
    postage
    affixed.
    SUBSCRIBED
    AND
    SWORN
    TO
    BEFORE
    this
    day of
    November,
    2008
    Notary
    Pub
    ic
    General
    Counsel
    Illinois
    Dept.
    Of Natural
    Resources
    One Natural
    Resources
    Way
    Springfield,
    IL
    62702-1271
    on
    November
    7, 2008,
    with
    OFFICIAL
    SEAL
    DAWN
    A. HOLLIS
    :
    NOTARY
    PUBLIC, STATE
    OF
    ll.UN0IS
    ±
    .oooooo
    UYc MISSION
    6666
    EXPIRES8.19-2O12
    6666.6oo6o6
    THIS
    FILING
    IS SUBMITTED
    ON
    RECYCELD
    PAPER

    Back to top